You are on page 1of 324

Kodak DryView

8300/8600/8610 LASER IMAGING SYSTEMS

User Guides
Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imager

User Guide

1340744
41-1202-0185-4
3/02 Rev. E
Classification, Warnings, and Cautions

Classification, Warnings, and Cautions


for Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imager
Read and understand all instructions before using.
Classifications
UL Classified

File Number E163816


Control Number 48VF

Medical Equipment
UL 2601-1 CAN/CSA No. 601.1
!
Classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. With Respect to Electric Shock,
Fire, Casualty and Medical Hazards only in Accordance with UL 2601-1, CAN/CSA
C22.2 No. 601.1 and IEC 601.1.

! WARNING
This equipment is operated with hazardous voltage which can shock,
burn, or cause death.
Remove wall plug before servicing equipment. Never pull on cord to remove from
outlet. Grasp plug and pull to disconnect.
Do not operate equipment with a damaged power cord.
Do not use an extension cord to power this equipment.
Position the power cord so it will not be tripped over or pulled.
Connect this equipment to a grounded outlet.
Do not place a portable multiple socket outlet (power strip) on the floor. Mount the
power strip on a wall or on the underside of a table.

! WARNING
Not protected against ingress of liquids, including bodily fluids.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 i


User Guide

! WARNING
For continued protection against fire, replace fuses only with fuses of the same type
and fuse rating.

8300-128A

Avoid touching the developer drum when removing film jams from the imager. The
developer drum may become hot during extended imager operation.

! CAUTION
Do not use in the presence of flammable anesthetics, oxygen or nitrous oxide. This
equipment does not have a gas sealed electronics enclosure and could ignite any
flammable or explosive gases present in its environment.

! CAUTION
U.S. Federal law restricts sale of this device to or on the order of a licensed health
care practitioner.

! CAUTION
Grounding reliability can only be achieved when this equipment is connected to an
equivalent receptacle marked “Hospital Only” or “Hospital Grade.”

! CAUTION
This equipment is intended to connect to other medical devices. Installation and
service maintenance are to be performed only by qualified service personnel. If a
Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System is used with the Kodak DryView 8300
Laser Imager, the Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System must be installed no
closer than 1.83 meters from a patient bed or chair.

ii 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Classification, Warnings, and Cautions

! CAUTION
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. Those limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

! CAUTION

Avoid Laser Beam


This equipment employs an invisible 25 milliwatt laser beam. Laser
radiation may be present when the machine operates without panels or
covers installed.
Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein, may result in eye damage.
Covers shall be removed by authorized service personnel only.
There are no “user” serviceable parts in this machine other than the developer filter.

! CAUTION
Do not substitute or modify any part of this equipment without approval of Eastman
Kodak Company.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 iii


User Guide

! CAUTION
General External Cleaning: This equipment may be cleaned with a damp cloth
using water with mild detergent, or commercial electronic equipment cleaner.

Type B Applied Part

iv 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Safety, EMC, and CE Marking Compliance

Safety, EMC, and CE Marking Compliance


This equipment has been tested for and complies with the following Safety and
Emission Standards. Certificates of Compliance and Declarations of Conformity
have been issued for the following areas:

Australia/New Zealand:
AS/NZS 3548:1992
AS 2211-1991
AS3200.1-1990/NZS 6150:1990

Canada:
C108.8-M1983 Class A (Conducted and Emitted EMI/RFI Specs)
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 601.1

Europe:
EN50082-1 (EMC)
EN55011 Group 1 Class A (Medical Device Safety)
EN60601-1 (Safety Medical Equipment)
EN60825:1991 (Laser Safety)
EN61000-3-2: Harmonics
IEC61000-3-3:1995 Voltage Fluctuations/Flicker
IEC61000-4-2:1995 ESD
IEC61000-4-3:1996 Radiated Radio Frequency
IEC61000-4-4:1995 Fast Transient/Burst
IEC61000-4-5:1995 Surge
IEC61000-4-6: Conducted Radio Frequency
IEC61000-4-8: Power Frequency Magnetic Fields
IEC61000-4-11: Dips and Interrupts

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 v


User Guide

Japan:
CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A

USA:
FCC (47CFR15B) Class A (Conducted and Emitted EMI/RFI Specs)
FDA: 21CFR CH-1. SCH-J. Part 1040 (Performance Standards for Light
Emitting Products)
UL 2601-1 (Medical and Dental Equipment)
IEC 601-1-2 (EMC for Medical Devices)
IEC 825-1 (Laser Safety)

ROW:
CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A (Conducted and Emitted EMI/RFI Specs)
IEC 1000-4-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, and 11

CE Marking:
This equipment is part of a medical system and conforms to the medical safety and
EMC in EN60601-1, EN60601-1-2, and the 93/42/EEC, MDD (Medical Device
Directive).
A Technical File and Declaration of Conformity with the Essential Requirements of
the Medical Device Directive have been prepared and signed by the appropriate
personnel and are located at:
Kodak GmbH
Quality Services and Product Safety
70323 Stuttgart Germany
Telephone 49-0711-40-06-5291

vi 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Safety, EMC, and CE Marking Compliance

FCC:
This device complies with the limits for a Class A digital device listed in Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.

Industry Canada:
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement
sur le matérial brouilleur du Canada.

EU:
This equipment complies with the January 1996 EU Community EMC Requirements,
per EN55011 Class A.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 vii


User Guide

BLANK PAGE

viii 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Warnhinweise

Warnhinweise für das Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imaging-System

 :$5181*
Dieses Gerät wird mit Spannungen betrieben, die elektrische Schläge, Ver-
brennungen und tödliche Verletzungen verursachen können.
Vor der Wartung ist der Netzstecker zu ziehen. Niemals am Kabel ziehen, wenn Sie den
Stecker aus der Steckdose ziehen. Den Stecker fassen und herausziehen.
Das Gerät nicht mit einem beschädigten Netzkabel betreiben.
Beim Einsatz dieses Geräts kein Verlängerungskabel verwenden.
Das Netzkabel so verlegen, daß keine Stolpergefahr besteht und es nicht beschädigt wird.
Dieses Gerät darf nur an eine geerdete Steckdose angeschlossen werden.
Eine Steckdosenleiste nicht auf den Boden legen, sondern an einer Wand oder an der Un-
terseite eines Tisches befestigen.

 :$5181*
Das Gerät vor dem Eindringen von Flüssigkeiten schützen.

2002 März Rev. E 1340744_DE i


Benutzerhandbuch

 :$5181*
Für fortgesetzten Brandschutz müssen Sicherungen gleicher Art und gleichen Nennstroms
zum Auswechseln benutzt werden.

$

Bei der Auflösung eines Filmstaus die Entwicklerwalze nicht berühren, da sie bei längerem
Betrieb heiß werden kann.

 VORSICHT
Bei Verwendung dieses Gerätes in der Umgebung von feuergefährlichen Narkosegasen,
Sauerstoff und/oder Lachgas kann Explosionsgefahr bestehen. Das Gehäuse der
Elektronik dieses Gerätes ist nicht gasdicht. In der Umgebung vorhandene
endzündliche oder explosive Gase könnten entzündet werden.

! VORSICHT
Eine zuverlässige Erdung kann nur gewährleistet werden, wenn dieses Gerät an eine für den
Klinikeinsatz entsprechend gekennzeichnete Erdungssteckdose angeschlossen wird.

! VORSICHT
Dieses Gerät ist für den Anschluß an andere medizinische Geräte vorgesehen. Installation
und Servicewartung dürfen nur durch speziell ausgebildetes Instandhaltungspersonal durch-
geführt werden. Bei Anschluß des Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imaging-Systems an das
Kodak PACS Link 9410 Erfassungssystem ist darauf zu achten, daß das PACS Link 9410
System mindestens 1,83 Meter vom Bett des Patienten oder vom Behandlungsstuhl entfernt
aufgestellt werden muß.

ii 1340744_DE 2002 März Rev. E


Warnhinweise

 9256,&+7
Dieses Gerät entspricht den Grenzwerten für digitale Geräte der Klasse A gemäß Teil 15 der
FCC-Vorschriften. Diese Werte bieten einen angemessenen Schutz gegen Störungen in
Wohngegenden. Wenn das Gerät nicht von geschultem Personal installiert und in Überein-
stimmung mit dem Benutzerhandbuch benutzt wird, kann es Störungen des Radioempfangs
und an anderen elektronischen Geräten verursachen. Es besteht jedoch keine Garantie, daß
nicht doch vereinzelt Störungen auftreten können. Sollte dieses Gerät den Radio- oder TV-
Empfang stören - dies kann durch Ein- und Ausschalten des Gerätes festgestellt werden -,
so sollte der Benutzer eine der folgenden Maßnahmen ergreifen:
! Antenne neu ausrichten oder neu positionieren.
! Zwischen Empfänger und Gerät einen größeren Abstand lassen.
! Das Gerät an eine Steckdose anschließen, die nicht mit dem Stromkreis des Empfängers
verbunden ist.
! Fragen Sie den Händler oder einen Radio- und Fernsehtechniker um Rat.

 9256,&+7

/DVHUVWUDKOHQPHLGHQ
In diesem Gerät kommt ein unsichtbarer 25-Milliwatt-Laserstrahl zum Einsatz.
Es kann eine Laserstrahlung vorhanden sein, wenn das Gerät ohne an den
vorgesehenen Stellen angebrachte Abdeckungen betrieben wird.
Die Einstellungen oder die Durchführung von Verfahren, die nicht in dieser Anleitung be-
schrieben sind, können zu Augenschäden führen.
Die Abdeckungen des Gerätes dürfen nur von autorisierten Instandhaltungs-
technikern (Service Personal) entfernt werden.
Mit Ausnahme des Entwicklerfilters enthält diese Maschine keine vom Benutzer zu warten-
den Teile.

 9256,&+7
Keine Teile dieses Geräts ohne die Genehmigung der Eastman Kodak Company ersetzen
oder modifizieren.
2002 März Rev. E 1340744_DE iii
Benutzerhandbuch

 9256,&+7
Allgemeines Reinigen der Geräteaußenseite: Dieses Gerät kann mit einem mit Wasser
und einem milden Reinigungsmittel angefeuchteten Tuch oder einem handelsüblichen Reini-
gungsmittel für elektronische Geräte gereinigt werden.

&ODVVODVHUSURGXNWWR,(&
/DVHU.ODVVH3URGXNWQDFK,(&
/DVHUGHFDWHJRULHV,(&

Teiletyp B
iv 1340744_DE 2002 März Rev. E
Sicherheit, EMV und CE-Kennzeichnung

Sicherheit, EMV und CE-Kennzeichnung


Dieses Gerät wurde gemäß folgender Normen für technische Sicherheit und EMV-
Bestimmungen geprüft und genehmigt. Es wurden die folgenden
Einhaltungsbescheinigungen und Konformitätserklärungen ausgestellt.

Europa:
EN50082–1 (EMC)
EN55011 Gruppe 1 Klasse A (EMU für Medizinische Geräte)
EN60601–1 (Sicherheitsrichtlinien für Medizinische Geräte)
EN60825:1991 (Lasersicherheit)
EN61000–3–2: Oberschwingungen
IEC61000–3–3:1995 Spannungsschwankungen/kurzzeitige Spannungswechsel
IEC61000–4–2:1995 ESD
IEC61000–4–3:1996 Abgestrahlte hochfrequente Störungen
IEC61000–4–4:1995 Schnelle Übergänge/kurzzeitige Spannungsspitzen
IEC61000–4–5:1995 Stoßspannungen
IEC61000–4–6: Störungen gegenüber induzierten Hochfrequenzfeldern
IEC61000–4–8: Magnetfelder mit energietechnischen Frequenzen
IEC61000–4–11: Spannungseinbrüche und kurzzeitige Unterbrechungen

2002 März Rev. E 1340744_DE v


Benutzhandbuch

CE-Kennzeichnung:
Dieses Gerät ist Teil eines medizinischen Systems, das gemäß den Normen EN60601–1,
EN60601–1–2 und 93/42/EEC DMG (Direktive für medizinische Geräte) den Bestimmungen
der medizinischen Sicherheit und elektromagentischen Verträglichkeit entspricht.
Ein technisches Heft und eine Konformitätserklärung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen
der Direktive für medizinische Geräte wurden von dem verantwortlichen Personal vorbereitet
und unterschrieben und befinden sich bei:
Kodak GmbH
Qualität und Produktsicherheit
70323 Stuttgart
Deutschland
Telefon 49–0711–406–2993

FCC:
Dieses Gerät entspricht den Grenzen für digitale Geräte der Klasse A, aufgelistet in Teil 15
der FCC-Vorschriften. Beim Betrieb dieses Gerätes muß folgendes beachtet werden:
(1) Dieses Gerät darf keine Störstrahlungen verursachen, und
(2) dieses Gerät muß jede empfangene Strahlung akzeptieren, einschließlich der
Strahlungen, die unerwünschte Betriebsfunktionen hervorrufen.

Industry Canada:
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference–Causing
Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le
matérial brouilleur du Canada.

EU:
Dieses Gerät erfüllt die EMV-Anforderungen der Europäischen Gemeinschaft vom Januar
1996 gemäß EN55011 Klasse A.

vi 1340744_DE 2002 März Rev. E


Clasificación, advertencias y precauciones

Clasificación, advertencias y precauciones para el


Procesador de imágenes láser Kodak DryView 8300

Lea y comprenda todas las instrucciones antes de utilizar el equipo.

Classifications
UL Classified

File Number E163816


Control Number 48VF
Medical Equipment
UL 2601–1 CAN/CSA No. 601.1
!
Clasificado por Underwriters Laboratories Inc.® con respecto a riesgos de choque
eléctrico, incendios, accidentes y médicos solo en cumplimiento con UL 2601-1, CAN/CSA
C22.2 No. 60.1 e IEC 601.1.

! ADVERTENCIA

Este equipo se utiliza con un voltaje peligroso que puede ocasionar descargas,
quemaduras o la muerte.
Desconecte el enchufe de la pared antes de hacer cualquier operación de mantenimiento del
equipo. Nunca tire del cable para retirar el enchufe. Tire directamente del enchufe para
desconectarlo.
No utilice el equipo con un cordón de alimentación dañado.
No utilice un cordón de extensión para alimentar este equipo.
Coloque el cable de modo tal que no se pueda tropezar ni dar tirones del mismo.
Conecte el equipo a un enchufe con toma a tierra.

2002 Marzo Rev. E 1340744_ES i


Guía del Usuario

No situar un enchufe múltiple portátil (banda de energía) en el suelo. Monte la banda de


energía en una pared o en la parte inferior de una mesa

! ADVERTENCIA

No está protegido contra el ingreso de líquidos, incluyendo líquidos corporales.

! ADVERTENCIA

Para contar con una protección continuada contra incendios, realice el reemplazo de fusibles
con otros de su mismo tipo y rango.

8300-128A

Trate de no tocar el rodillo de revelado al retirar una película atascada. El rodillo puede
recalentarse durante el funcionamiento del procesador de imágenes láser.

! PRECAUCIÓN

No utilice este equipo en la presencia de anestésicos inflamables, oxígeno u óxido nitroso. El


sistema electrónico de este equipo no cuenta con una caja hermética contra gases y podría
encender cualquier gas inflamable o explosivo que esté presente a su alrededor.

! PRECAUCIÓN

Sólo se puede garantizar que haya una conexión a tierra segura cuando el aparato se conecta a
una caja de enchufe para puesta a tierra con la indicación correspondiente para el uso en clínicas.

! PRECAUCIÓN

Este equipo tiene como objetivo la conexión a otros aparatos médicos de diagnóstico. La
instalación y el servicio de mantenimiento deberán ser realizados únicamente por personal
técnico calificado. Si un sistema de adquisición Kodak PACS Link 9410 es usado en
combinación con el Kodak DryView 8300, el sistema PACS Link 9410 no debe ser instalado
a una distancia menor de 1,83 metros de la cama o silla del paciente.
ii 1340744_ES 2002 Marzo Rev. E
Clasificación, advertencias y precauciones

! PRECAUCIÓN

Se ha comprobado que este equipo cumple con los límites para la clase A de dispositivos
digitales, según la parte 15 de los reglamentos FCC. Estos límites han sido diseñados para
proveer una protección adecuada contra interferencias dañinas en una instalación
residencial. Este equipo genera, utiliza y puede radiar energía de radio frecuencia y si no ha
sido instalado ni es usado conforme a las instrucciones, puede causar interferencias en la
comunicación de radio. Sin embargo no se puede garantizar totalmente que no ocurran
interferencias en una instalación particular. En caso que el equipo causara interferencias
dañinas en la recepción de radio o televisión, lo cual se puede determinar cuando el equipo
es apagado o encendido, el usuario está llamado a tratar de corregir las interferencias
tomando una o más de las siguientes medidas:
! Reorientar la antena de recepción o reinstalarla en otro sitio.
! Aumentar la distancia entre el equipo y el receptor.
! Conectar el equipo a una salida de un circuito que sea diferente al cual el receptor está
conectado.
! Consultar al vendedor o a un técnico experimentado de radio y televisión.

! PRECAUCIÓN

(YLWHPLUDUHOUD\RGHOiVHU

Este equipo utiliza un rayo de láser invisible de 25 milivatios. La radiación del


láser puede producirse cuando el aparato funciona sin los paneles o cubiertas
instalados.
En caso de utilizar controles, ajustes o configuraciones, o procedimientos no especificados
en este manual, pueden producirse lesiones en los ojos.
Las cubiertas deberán ser retiradas únicamente por el personal técnico cualificado.
No hay partes “reemplazables por el usuario” en este aparato excepto el filtro.

! PRECAUCIÓN

No sustituya ni modifique ninguna pieza de este equipo sin la aprobación de Eastman Kodak
Company.
2002 Marzo Rev. E 1340744_ES iii
Guía del Usuario

! PRECAUCIÓN

Limpieza externa general: Este equipo puede limpiarse con un paño húmedo usando agua
con un detergente suave o con limpiador de equipo electrónico comercial.

Pieza aplicada tipo B

iv 1340744_ES 2002 Marzo Rev. E


Cumplimiento de las normas de Seguridad, EMC y Marca CE

Cumplimiento de las normas de Seguridad, EMC y Marca CE

Este equipo ha sido probado y satisface las siguientes especificaciones de Normas de


Seguridad y Niveles de Emisión. Se han otorgado Certificados de Cumplimiento y
Declaraciones de Conformidad para los siguientes países:

Australia /Nueva Zelanda:


AS/NZS 3548:1992
AS 2211–1991
AS3200.1–1990/NZS 6150:1990

Canadá:
C108.8–M1983 Clase A (Conducción y emisión. EMI(Interferencia electromagnética)/RFI
(interferencia de radiofrecuencia)
CAN/CSA–C22.2 No. 601.1

Europa:
EN50082–1 (EMC)
EN55011 Grupo 1 Clase A (seguridad de dispositivo médico)
EN60601–1 (Equipo médico de seguridad)
EN60825:1991 (Seguridad de láser)
EN61000–3–2: (armonicas)
IEC61000–3–3:1995 Fluctuaciones de tensión/titilación
IEC61000–4–2:1995 ESD (Asociación de descarga electrostática)
IEC61000–4–3:1996 Radio frecuencia radiada
IEC61000–4–4:1995 Picos temporáneos de tensión
IEC61000–4–5:1995 Impulso de corriente
IEC61000–4–6: Radio frecuencia conducida
IEC61000–4–8: Campos magnéticos de alta frecuencia
IEC61000–4–11: Dips (caja dual en línea) e interrupciones

2002 Marzo Rev. E 1340744_ES v


Guía del Usuario

Japón:
CISPR 11 Grupo 1 Clase A

EE.UU:
FCC (47CFR15B) Clase A (Conducción y emisión. EMI(Interferencia
electromagnética)/RFI (interferencia de radiofrecuencia)
FDA: 21CFR CH–1. SCH–J. Parte 1040 Estándar de calidad para productos que emiten
luz.
UL 2601–1 (Equipo médico y dental)
IEC 601–1–2 (EMC para dispositivos médicos)
IEC 825–1 (Seguridad de láser)

FILA:
CISPR 11 Grupo 1 Clase A (Conducción y emisión. EMI(Interferencia
electromagnética)/RFI (interferencia de radiofrecuencia)
IEC 1000–4–2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, y 11

Marca CE:
Este equipo es parte de un sistema de diagnóstico médico y cumple con las normas de
seguridad médica y EMC en EN60601–1, EN60601–1–2, y 93/42/EEC, MDD (Directivas
para aparatos médicos).
Se ha elaborado un Archivo Técnico y una Declaración de Conformidad, con los requisitos
esenciales de la Directriz para Dispositivos Médicos, preparados y firmados por el personal
de fabricación correspondiente. Estos documentos se encuentran en:
Kodak GmbH
Quality Services and Product Safety
70323 Stuttgart Alemania
Telephone 49–0711–40–06–5291

vi 1340744_ES 2002 Marzo Rev. E


Cumplimiento de las normas de Seguridad, EMC y Marca CE

FCC:
Este equipo cumple con los límites establecidos para los aparatos digitales de
Clase A, mencionados en la Parte 15 de las Normas FCC. El funcionamiento está sujeto a
las dos condiciones siguientes:
1. Este equipo no debe causar interferencias perjudiciales, y
2. Este equipo deberá aceptar todo tipo de interferencia recibida, incluyendo interferencias
que puedan ocasionar funcionamiento no deseado.

Industry Canadá:
Este aparato de la clase A cumple todas las exigencias de las prescripciones canadienses a
cerca de equipos que pueden causar interferencias.
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le
matérial brouilleur du Canada.

EU:
Este equipo cumple con los Requisitos EMC de la Comunidad EU, de enero de 1996, según
la norma EN55011, Clase A.

2002 Marzo Rev. E 1340744_ES vii


Guía del Usuario

PÁGINA EN BLANCO

viii 1340744_ES 2002 Marzo Rev. E


Homologations, avertissements et précautions

Homologations, avertissements et précautions relatifs au


reprographe laser Kodak DryView 8300

Lisez toutes les instructions avant d'utiliser l'équipement et


assurez-vous de bien le comprendre.

Classifications
UL Classified

File Number E163816


Control Number 48VF
Medical Equipment
UL 2601–1 CAN/CSA No. 601.1
!
Homologué par Underwriters Laboratories Inc.® relativement aux risques de choc
électrique, d’incendie, de décès ou de blessures conformément aux articles UL 2601–1,
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 601.1 et IEC 601.1.

! ATTENTION
Cette équipement génère des tensions pouvant causer des chocs et des
brûlures, voire même la mort.
Retirez la fiche murale avant d'entretenir l'équipement. Ne tirez jamais sur le cordon pour le
débrancher de la prise électique. Saisissez plutôt la fiche et tirez-la pour débrancher le cordon.
N'utilisez pas l'équipement avec un cordon d'alimentation endommagé.
N'utilisez pas une rallonge électrique pour alimenter cet équipement.
Placez le cordon d’alimentation de sorte que personne ne puisse trébucher ou tirer dessus.
Branchez cet équipement à une prisee électrique avec mise à la terre.

2002 Mars Rév. E 1340744_FR i


Guide de l’utilisateur

Ne placez pas de bloc multiprises (multiprise d'alimentation) sur le sol. Installez la multiprise
d'alimentation sur un mur ou sur le dessous d'une table.

! AVERTISSEMENT

Sans protection contre l’infiltration de liquides, y compris les liquides organiques.

! AVERTISSEMENT

Pour une protection permanente contre le feu, remplacer les fusibles par d’autres de même
type et calibre.

8300-128A

Evitez de toucher le rouleau de développement au moment de retirer des films coincés dans
le reprographe. Le rouleau peut devenir brûlant à la suite d’une utilisation prolongée de la
machine.

! ATTENTION
Ne pas utiliser en présence d’anesthésiants inflammables, d’oxygène ou d’oxyde nitreux. Cette
machine n’est pas équipée d’un boîtier pour pièces électroniques hermétique au gaz et peut
enflammer n’importe quel gaz explosif ou inflammable présent dans son environnement.

! ATTENTION
Une mise à la terre fiable ne peut être garantie que lorsque cet appareil est relié à une prise
de terre spécifique pour l’utilisation en clinique.

ii 1340744_FR 2002 Mars Rév. E


Homologations, avertissements et précautions

! ATTENTION
Cet équipement est conçu pour être connecté à d'autres dispositifs médicaux. L'installation et
l'entretien doivent être uniquement par un technicien de service qualifié.
Si vous utiliser un système d’acquisition PACS Link 9410 de Kodak avec le reprographe
laser Kodak DryView 8300, assurez-vous que la distance entre le système d’acquisition
PACS Link 9410 et le patient est de 1,83 m au minimum.

! ATTENTION

Les tests auxquels ce matériel a été soumis indiquent qu'il répond aux tolérances définies
pour les appareils numériques de catégorie A, conformément à l'article 15 de la
réglementation du FCC (administrations des télécommunications aux États-Unis). Ces limites
sont conçues pour garantir une protection raisonnable contre les interférences nocives dans
une installation résidentielle. Cet équipement crée, utilise et peut émettre de l'énergie de
fréquence radio et peut, s'il n'est pas installé et utilisé selon les instructions du Guide
d'utilisation, être la cause d'interférences nuisibles aux communications radio. Cependant, il
n'est pas exclu que des interférences se produisent dans une installation en particulier. Si ce
matériel provoque des interférences nuisible à la réception des émissions de radio et de
télévision, ce qui peut être déterminé en provoquant la mise hors tension puis la remise sous
tension du matériel, l'utilisateur est encouragé à essayer de corriger les interférences en
prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes:
! réorienter ou installer l'antenne de réception à un autre endroit.
! augmenter la distance entre le matériel et le récepteur.
! connecter le matériel dans une prise de courant ayant un circuit différent de celui sur
lequel le récepteur est connecté.
! consulter le revendeur ou demander l'assistance d'un réparateur radio/TV expérimenté.

! ATTENTION

Eviter de regarder le rayon laser

Cette machine emploie un faisceau laser invisible de 25 milliwatts. Le


rayonnement laser peut être présent lorsque la machine fonctionne alors que
les panneaux et les couvercles ont été retirés.
L’utilisation de commandes ou de réglages ainsi que l’exécution de procédures autres que
ceux indiqués dans ce guide peuvent être à l’origine de lésions oculaires.

2002 Mars Rév. E 1340744_FR iii


Guide de l’utilisateur

Ne confier à personne d’autre que le personnel d’entretien autorisé le soin de


retirer les couvercles.
La machine ne contient aucune pièce réparable par l’utilisateur, à l’exception du filtre de
développement.

ATTENTION
!
La substitution et toute modification exige l’autorisation expresse de Eastman Kodak Company.

iv 1340744_FR 2002 Mars Rév. E


Homologations, avertissements et précautions

! ATTENTION
Entretien externe: Cet équipement peut être nettoyé avec un chiffon imbibé d’eau
additionné de détergent doux ou d’un agent de nettoyage pour équipement électronique.

Pièce appliquée de type B

2002 Mars Rév. E 1340744_FR v


Guide de l’utilisateur

PAGE BLANCHE

vi 1340744_FR 2002 Mars Rév. E


Conformité aux normes de sécurite, CEM et marquage CE

Conformité aux normes de sécurite, CEM et marquage CE

Les tests auxquels cette machine a été soumise ont montré qu’elle se conformait aux
normes de sécurité et d’émission suivantes. Des certificats et des déclarations de conformité
ont été délivrés pour les pays suivants:

Australie/Néo-Zélande:
AS/NZS 3548:1992
AS 2211–1991
AS3200.1–1990/NZS 6150:1990

Canada:
C108.8–M1983 classe A (Spécifications relatives au ronflement électromagnétique/aux
parasites H.F transmis par conduction et émis.)
CAN/CSA–C22.2 # 601.1

Europe:
EN50082–1 (CEM)
EN55011 groupe 1 classe A (Sécurité des Appareils à Usage Médical)
EN60601–1 (Equipement Médical de Sécurité)
EN60825:1991 (Sécurité Laser)
EN61000–3–2: Harmonique
IEC61000–3–3:1995 Fluctuations de tension/Papillotement
IEC61000–4–2:1995 ESD
IEC61000–4–3:1996 Radiofréquence rayonnée
IEC61000–4–4:1995 Phénomène transitoire rapide/Rupture
IEC61000–4–5:1995 Pointe de tension
IEC61000–4–6: Radiofréquence dirigée
IEC61000–4–8: Champs magnétiques de fréquence industrielle
IEC61000–4–11: Baisses et interruptions
2002 Mars Rév. E 1340744_FR vii
Guide de l’utilisateur

Japon:
CISPR 11 groupe 1 classe A

Etats-Unis:
FCC (47CFR15B) classe A (Spécifications relatives au ronflement électromagnétique/aux
parasites H.F transmis par conduction et émis.)
FDA: 21CFR CH–1. SCH–J. Partie 1040 (Normes de performance des produits
électroluminescents)
UL 2601–1 (Equipement à Usage Médical et Dentaire)
IEC 601–1-2 (CEM pour Appareils Médicaux)
IEC 825–1 (Sécurité Laser)

Reste du monde:
CISPR 11 groupe 1 classe A (Spécifications relatives au ronflement
électromagnétique/aux parasites H.F transmis par conduction et émis.)
IEC 1000–4–2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, et 11

viii 1340744_FR 2002 Mars Rév. E


Conformité aux normes de sécurite, CEM et marquage CE

Marquage CE:
Cet appareil fait partie d’un système médical et est conforme aux normes de sécurité
médicale et de compatibilité électromagnétique EN60601–1, EN60601–1–2 et à la directive
relative aux appareils médicaux 93/42/EEC.
Un fichier technique et la déclaration de conformité aux exigences essentielles de la directive
relative aux appareils médicaux ont été préparés et signés par le personnel concerné et sont
conservés à:
Kodak GmbH
Quality Services and Product Safety
70323 Stuttgart Allemagne
Téléphone 49–0711–40–06–5291

FCC:
Cet appareil est conforme aux limitations des appareils numériques de Classe A énoncées à
la Partie 15 des Normes FCC. Son utilisation est soumise aux conditions suivantes:
(1) Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences dangereuses, et
(2) Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris les interférences pouvant
provoquer un fonctionnement indésirable.

Normes industrielles au Canada:


Cette appareil numérique de la Classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le
matériel brouilleur du Canada.

Union Européenne:
Cet équipement respecte les Exigences relatives à la Compatibilité Electromagnétique dans
la Communauté de l’Union Européenne en date de janvier 1996 en vertu de la norme
EN55011 Classe A.

2002 Mars Rév. E 1340744_FR ix


Guide de l’utilisateur

PAGE BLANCHE

x 1340744_FR 2002 Mars Rév. E


Classificazioni, avvertenze e messaggi di attenzione

Classificazioni, avvertenze e informazioni sulla sicurezza


per il sistema laser per imaging Kodak DryView 8300

Leggere e comprendere tutte le istruzioni prima dell’uso.

Classifications
UL Classified

File Number E163816


Control Number 48VF
Medical Equipment
UL 2601–1 CAN/CSA No. 601.1
!
Classificati dalla Underwriters Laboratories Inc.® In relazione a scosse elettriche,
incendi, fatalità e pericoli per la salute unicamente in conformità con l’UL 2601–1, CAN/CSA
C22.2 No. 601.1 ed IEC 601.1.

! AVVERTENZA

Questa attrezzatura funziona con voltaggio pericoloso che può causare


scosse, ustioni o il decesso.
Estrarre la spina dalla presa a muro prima di riparare o effettuare la manutenzione
dell'apparecchiatura. Mai tirare il cavo per staccare la spina dalla presa. Afferrare la spina e
tirarla per staccarla.
Non azionare l'apparrecchiatura se il cavo di alimentazione risulta danneggiato.
Non ricorrere all’uso di una prolunga per alimentare l’apparecchiatura.
Posizionare il cavo di alimentazione in modo che non sia d'ingombro e che non possa essere
staccato accidentalmente.
Collegare questa attrezzatura ad una presa messa a terra.
Non appoggiare una presa multipla mobile (cavo di alimentazione) sul pavimento.
Posizionare il cavo di alimentazione a muro o sotto un tavolo.
2002 marzo Rev. E 1340744_IT i
Guida dell‘utente

! AVVERTENZA

Non protetto contro l’ingresso di liquidi, inclusi i fluidi corporei.

! AVVERTENZA

Per una protezione costante contro gli incendi, sostituire i fusibili con quelli dello stesso tipo e
dello stesso valore.

8300-128A

Evitare di toccare il rullo sviluppatore quando si rimuove il film inceppato dal sistema per
imaging. Il rullo sviluppatore può diventare caldo durante lunghi periodi di funzionamento del
sistema per imaging.

! ATTENZIONE
Non usare in presenza di sostanze incendiabili come anestetici, ossigeno e protossido di
azoto. Non è dotata di uno chassis a tenuta di gas e potrà infiammare i gas esplosivi o
infiammabili presenti nell'ambiente circostante.

! ATTENZIONE

Una messa a terra affidabile può essere garantita soltanto se l'apparecchio viene collegato
ad una presa di messa a terra per l'impiego in ospedale che sia contrassegnata come tale.

! ATTENZIONE

Questa apparecchiatura è concepita per il collegamento ad altri dispositivi medicali.


L'installazione ed i servizi di manutenzione devono essere eseguiti solo da personale tecnico
qualificato. Se si usa un sistema d'acquisizione Kodak PACS Link 9410 insieme al sistema
laser per imaging Kodak Dry View 8300, il sistema PACS Link 9410 deve stare ad almeno
1,83 metri di distanza dal lettino o dalla sedia del paziente.

ii 1340744_IT 2002 marzo Rev. E


Classificazioni, avvertenze e messaggi di attenzione

! ATTENZIONE

Questa apparecchiatura è stata testata per soddisfare i limiti previsti per un dispositivo
digitale della Classe A, in conformità alla parte 15 del regolamento FCC. Questi limiti sono
progettati per fornire una giusta protezione contro l’interferenza dannosa in un impianto
residenziale. Il presente apparecchio genera, usa e può emettere frequenze radio. In caso
non venisse installato ed usato secondo le istruzioni, potranno verificarsi interferenze con
comunicazioni radio. Ad ogni modo non esiste la garanzia che l’interferenza non si manifesti
in un particolare impianto. Se l'attrezzatura non provoca un’interferenza dannosa per la
ricezione delle onde radio e televisive che possono essere causate dall’accensione e dallo
spegnimento dell’apparecchiatura, l’utente sarà incoraggiato a tentare di correggere
l’interferenza seguendo una oppure più regole che illustriamo qui di seguito:
! riorientare o riposizionare l'antenna di ricezione.
! allontanare l'apparecchiatura dal ricevitore.
! collegare l'apparecchiatura ad una presa di un circuito diverso da quello a cui è stato
collegato il ricevitore.
! rivolgersi al venditore o ad un radiotecnico e riparatore TV competente.

! ATTENZIONE

Evitare il raggio laser


Questa attrezzatura usa un raggio laser invisibile da 25 milliwatt. È possibile la
presenza di radiazioni laser quando la macchina funziona senza pannelli o
protezioni installate.
L’uso di comandi o regolazioni, o l’esecuzione le procedure in modo diverso da quanto qui
specificato, possono risultare in danni agli occhi.
Le protezioni vanno rimosse solo dal personale di assistenza autorizzato.
Questa macchina, oltre al filtro della sviluppatrice, non ha parti riparabili dall’utente.

! ATTENZIONE

Non sostituire o alterare alcuna parte di questa apparecchiatura senza l’approvazione della
Eastman Kodak Company.

2002 marzo Rev. E 1340744_IT iii


Guida dell‘utente

! ATTENZIONE
Pulizia generale esterna: questa attrezzatura può essere pulita con un panno umido
utilizzando una soluzione di acqua ed un detersivo neutro, oppure un detergente per
attrezzatura elettronica in commercio.

parte Tipo B in funzione


iv 1340744_IT 2002 marzo Rev. E
Sicurezza, compatibilità elettromagnetica e conformità alla marcatura CE

Nome riguardanti la sicurezza, compatibilità elettromagnetica


e conformità alla marcatura CE
La presente apparecchiatura è stata sottoposta a prove che attestano la conformità con le
seguenti norme di sicurezza e di emissione. Sono stati rilasciati certificati di conformità per i
seguenti paesi:

Australia:
AS/NZS 3548:1992
AS 2211–1991
AS3200.1–1990/NZS 6150:1990
Canada:
C108.8–M1983 classe A (Specifiche riguardanti interferenze elettromagnetiche/RF
emesse e condotte)
CAN/CSA–C22.2 n. 601.1
Europa:
EN50082–1 (Compatibilità elettromagnetica)
EN55011 gruppo 1 classe A (Sicurezza di apparecchiature medicali)
EN60601–1 (Apparecchiature elettromedicali - Norme generali di sicurezza)
EN60825:1991 (Sicurezza laser)
EN61000–3–2: Armoniche
IEC61000–3–3:1995 Armoniche di corrente/flicker
IEC61000–4–2:1995 Immunità alla scarica elettrostatica "ESD"
IEC61000–4–3:1996 Sucettibilità radiata a RF
IEC61000–4–4:1995 Immunità ai transitori veloci/"BURST"
IEC61000–4–5:1995 Immunità ad impulsi di tensione "SURGE"
IEC61000–4–6: Suscettibilità condotta a RF
IEC61000–4–8: Prova a campo magnetico
IEC61000–4–11: Immunità a buchi e brevi interruzioni di tensione
2002 marzo Rev. E 1340744_IT v
Manuale utente

Giappone:
CISPR 11 gruppo 1 classe A

USA:
FCC (47CFR15B) classe A (Specifiche riguardanti interferenze RF/elettromagnetiche
emesse e condotte)
FDA: 21CFR CH–1. SCH–J. Parte 1040 (Norme riguardanti il funzionamento per prodotti
ad emissione di luce)
UL 2601–1 (Apparecchiature medicali e dentali)
IEC 601–1–2 (Compatibilità elettromagnetica per apparecchiature medicali)
IEC 825–1 (Sicurezza laser)

Altri paesi:
CISPR 11 gruppo 1 classe A (Specifiche riguardanti interferenze RF/elettromagnetiche
emesse e condotte)
IEC 1000–4–2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, e 11

Marcatura CE:
Questo apparecchio fa parte di un sistema medico ed è conforme alle norme EN60601-1,
EN60601-1-2 e 93/42/CEE MDD (direttiva per apparecchiature elettromedicali).
Un file tecnico e la dichiarazione di conformità con i requisiti principali delle direttive
riguardanti apparecchi elettromedicali sono stati preparati dal personale addetto e possono
essere consultati presso:
Kodak GmbH
Quality Services and Product Safety
70323 Stoccarda (Germania)
Tel. 0049–(0)711–40–06–5291

vi 1340744_IT 2002 marzo Rev. E


Sicurezza, compatibilità elettromagnetica e conformità alla marcatura CE

FCC:
Questo dispositivo è conforme ai limiti per un dispositivo digitale di Classe A elencato nella
parte 15 delle norme FCC. Il funzionamento è soggetto alle seguenti due condizioni:
(1) Questo dispositivo non deve causare interferenze nocive, e
(2) Questo dispositivo deve accettare qualsiasi interferenza ricevuta, inclusa l’interferenza
che causa un funzionamento indesiderato.

Industria Canada:
Questo apparecchio digitale di classe A rispetta quanto previsto dalle norme canadesi
riguardanti apparecchiature causanti interferenze.
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le
matérial brouilleur du Canada.

EU:
Questa attrezzatura è conforme ai requisiti EMC della comunità EU del gennaio 1996,
secondo EN55011, Classe A.

2002 marzo Rev. E 1340744_IT vii


Manuale utente

PAGINA VUOTA

viii 1340744_IT 2002 marzo Rev. E


Classificação, Avisos e Cuidados

Classificação, Avisos e Cuidados com o Produtor de


imagens laser Kodak DryView 8300
Leia e compreenda todas as instruções antes de usar.
Classifications
UL Classified

File Number E163816


Control Number 48VF
Medical Equipment
UL 2601–1 CAN/CSA No. 601.1

&ODVVLILFDGRSRU8QGHUZULWHUV/DERUDWRULHV,QFŠHPUHODomRDFKRTXHVHOpWULFRV
LQFrQGLRDFLGHQWHVHULVFRVPpGLFRVDSHQDVGHDFRUGRFRP8/&$1&6$&
1RH,(&

! AVISO
Este equipamento funciona com voltagem perigosa que pode causar choques,
queimaduras ou morte.
Retire a tomada da parede antes de efetuar a manutenção do equipamento. Nunca puxe pelo
cabo para desligar a tomada da parede. Segure sempre no plugue para desconectar a tomada.
Não opere o equipamento se o cabo de alimentação estiver danificado.
Não use um fio de extensão para alimentar este equipamento.
Posicione o cabo elétrico de maneira que ele não cause tropeções nem seja puxado.
Conecte este equipamento a uma tomada com ligação terra.
Não coloque uma extensão elétrica portátil de múltiplas tomadas no solo. Posicione a
extensão elétrica em uma parede ou no lado de baixo de uma mesa.

2002 Março Rev. E 1340744_PB i


Manual do Usuário

! AVISO
Não protegido contra a entrada de líquidos, inclusive fluidos corporais.

! AVISO
Para garantir uma proteção contínua contra riscos de incêndio, substitua os fusíveis
queimados somente por outros do mesmo tipo e da mesma indicação de corrente.

8300-128A

Evite tocar no tambor de revelação quando estiver fazendo a remoção de filmes emperrados
no interior do equipamento. O tambor de revelação pode se aquecer durante um período de
funcionamento prolongado do equipamento.

CUIDADO
!

Não utilize na presença de anestésicos inflamáveis, oxigênio ou óxido nitroso. Este


equipamento não possui compartimento eletrônico vedado e pode causar combustão de
gases inflamáveis ou explosivos presentes no ambiente.
! CUIDADO
Um aterramento elétrico confiável somente poderá ser obtido quando este equipamento
estiver conectado a um receptáculo equivalente marcado como "Somente Hospital" ou
"Categoria Hospitalar".

! CUIDADO
Este equipamento está preparado para ser conectado a outros dispositivos médicos. A
instalação e a manutenção do serviço devem ser realizadas somente por funcionários
qualificados. Se for usado um Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System com o Kodak
DryView 8300, o sistema PACS Link 9410 deve estar instalado a uma distância não inferior
a 1,83 metros da cama ou cadeira do paciente.
ii 1340744_PB 2002 Março Rev. E
Classificação, Avisos e Cuidados

! CUIDADO

Este equipamento foi testado e constatou-se estar em conformidade com os limites


estabelecidos para um equipamento digital de Classe A, consoante à Parte 15 dos
regulamentos e normas da FCC. Estes limites são estabelecidos para prover uma proteção
razoável contra interferência danosa em uma instalação residencial. Este equipamento gera,
utiliza e pode emitir energia de rádio freqüência e, se não for instalado de acordo com as
instruções, poderá causar interferência danosa às comunicações de rádio. Contudo, não há
garantia de que não ocorrerá interferência em uma dada instalação em particular. Se este
equipamento causar interferência nas recepções de rádio ou de televisão, o que pode ser
verificado ligando-se e desligando-se o aparelho, o usuário é orientado a tentar corrigir esta
interferência por meio de um dos seguintes procedimentos descritos abaixo:
 Reoriente ou reposicione a antena de recepção.
 Aumente a distância que separa o equipamento do aparelho de recepção.
 Ligue o equipamento a uma tomada de força que esteja em um circuito diferente daquele
no qual se encontra conectado o aparelho de recepção.
 Consulte um representante ou um técnico profissional de rádio/TV para obter ajuda.

! CUIDADO

Evite o raio laser


Este equipamento emprega um raio laser invisível de 25 miliwatts. Radiação
laser pode estar presente quando a máquina estiver funcionando sem os
painéis ou tampas.
O uso de controles ou ajustes, ou a realização de procedimentos que não estejam
especificados aqui, pode resultar em danos aos olhos.
As tampas devem ser removidas somente por pessoal técnico autorizado.
Esta máquina não possui peças que possam sofrer manutenção por parte do usuário, exceto
o filtro do revelador.

!CUIDADO
Não substitua ou modifique nenhuma parte deste equipamento sem a aprovação da
Eastman Kodak Company.
2002 Março Rev. E 1340744_PB iii
Manual do Usuário

CUIDADO
!

Limpeza externa geral: Este equipamento pode ser limpo com um pano úmido usando água
com detergente neutro ou produtos para limpza comercial de equipamentos eletrônicos.

Tipo B parte aplicada

iv 1340744_PB 2002 Março Rev. E


Segurança, EMC e conformidade com Marcas CE

Segurança, EMC e conformidade com Marcas CE


Este equipamento foi testado e está de acordo com os seguintes padrões de segurança e de
emissão. Certificados e Declarações de Conformidade foram expedidos pelos seguintes
países:

Austrália:
AS/NZS 3548:1992
AS 2211–1991
AS3200.1–1990/NZS 6150:1990

Canadá:
C108.8–M1983 Classe A (Especificações de interferência eletromagnética e de rádio
freqüência (EMI/RFI) conduzida e irradiada)
CAN/CSA–C22.2 No. 601.1

Europa:
EN50082–1 (EMC)
EN55011 Grupo 1 Classe A (Segurança de dispositivo médico)
EN60601–1 (Equipamento médico de segurança)
EN60825:1991 (Segurança de laser)
EN61000–3–2: Harmônicos
IEC61000–3–3:1995 Flutuações de voltagem/oscilação
IEC61000–4–2:1995 ESD
IEC61000–4–3:1996 Rádio-freqüência irradiada
IEC61000–4–4:1995 Transiente rápido/seqüência de pulsos
IEC61000–4–5:1995 Pico de voltagem
IEC61000–4–6: Rádio-freqüência conduzida
IEC61000–4-8: Campos magnéticos de freqüência de energia
IEC61000–4-11: Chaves e interruptores
2002 Março Rev. E 1340744_PB v
Manual do Usuário

Japão:
CISPR 11 Grupo 1 Classe A

EUA:
FCC (47CFR15B) Classe A (Especificações de EMI/RFI conduzidas e emitidas)
FDA: 21CFR CH–1. SCH–J. Parte 1040 (Padrões de desempenho para
produtos emissores de luz)
UL 2601–1 (Equipamento médico e dental)
IEC 601–1–2 (EMC para dispositivos médicos)
IEC 825–1 (Segurança de laser)

ROW:
CISPR 11 Grupo 1 Classe A (Especificações de EMI/RFI conduzidas e emitidas)
IEC 1000–4–2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 e 11

Marcas CE:
Este equipamento é parte de um sistema médico e está de acordo com a segurança médica
e EMC em EN60601–1, EN60601–1–2 e 93/42/EEC, MDD (Diretiva de Dispositivo Médico).
Um Arquivo Técnico e Declaração de Conformidade com os requisitos essenciais da Diretiva
de Dispositivos Médicos foram preparados pelo pessoal apropriado e estão localizados na:
Kodak GmbH
Serviços de Qualidade e Segurança de Produtos
70323 Stuttgart, Alemanha
Telefone +49–0711–40–06–5291

vi 1340744_PB 2002 Março Rev. E


Segurança, EMC e conformidade com Marcas CE

FCC:
Este dispositivo está de acordo com os limites para um dispositivo digital Classe A listado na
parte 15 dos regulamentos FCC. A operação está sujeita às duas seguintes condições:
(1) Este dispositivo não pode causar interferência nociva e
(2) Este dispositivo deve aceitar qualquer interferência recebida, incluindo interferência que
pode causar operação indesejada.

Canadá:
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference–Causing
Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le
matérial brouilleur du Canada.

UE:
Este equipamento está de acordo com os Requerimentos EMC da Comunidade UE de
janeiro de 1996, por EN55011, Classe A.

2002 Março Rev. E 1340744_PB vii


Manual do Usuário

Esta página foi intencionalmente deixada em branco

viii 1340744_PB 2002 Março Rev. E


Table of Contents

PLEASE NOTE The information contained herein is based on the experience


and knowledge relating to the subject matter gained by Eastman
Kodak Company prior to publication.
No patent license is granted by this information.
Eastman Kodak Company reserves the right to change this
information without notice and makes no warranty, express or
implied, with respect to this information. Kodak shall not be liable
for any loss or damage, including consequential or special
damages, resulting from the use of this information, even if loss
or damage is caused by Kodak’s negligence or other fault.

Table of Contents
Description Page
Classification, Warnings, and Cautions
for Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Safety, EMC, and CE Marking Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Introducing the Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imager . . 1-1
How the 8300 Laser Imager Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Automatic Image Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Systems Connecting to the 8300 Laser Imager 1-3
C-ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Ultrasound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Nuclear Medicine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Service and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
IMPORTANT NOTICE TO PURCHASER . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imager Controls – Main . . 2-1
Local Panel Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
(Optional) Remote Keypad Controls and Indicators . . . 2-3

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 ix


User Guide

Description Page
System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Main Parameter Lists for Each Imager Type . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
General Setup Menus for Digital, Analog or SCSI Target
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) Menus . . . . . 2-9
SCSI Setup Menu (Disk Not in Drive – for Changes
to Default Parameter Values) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
SCSI Operational Setup Menus (Disk in Drive) . . . . . . . 2-11
SCSI Operational Setup Menu (Disk in Drive,
Aegis Uninitialized) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
SCSI Operational Setup Menu (Disk in Drive,
Aegis Initialized, Autoprint OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Network Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Menu Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Menu Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Parameter Menu Change Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Parameter Menu Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Operation and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
System Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Producing a Print from a Host Modality . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Producing a Print Using the Optional Keypad . . . . . . . . 3-2
Requesting Contrast Samples and Changing the
Contrast Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Digital or Analog Modalities with Host Control . . . . . 3-6
Digital or Analog Modalities with Remote Keypad . . 3-7
SCSI (M/O or Bernoulli Disks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Network (DICOM) Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Loading/Unloading the Film Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Local Panel and Remote Keypad Message Types . . . . 4-1
Local Panel Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Clearing Film Misfeeds or Jams – General . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Inserting the Film Saver and Removing the Film Tray . 4-10
Clearing Misfeeds from the Film Tray Area . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Clearing Jams from the Exposure Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

x 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Table of Contents

Description Page
Clearing Jams from the Developer and Exit Areas . . . . 4-13
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Clearing the Developer or Exit Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
System Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Test Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Menu Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Running Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Perform System Diagnostic Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Print SMPTE Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Keypad Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Display Software Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Display System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Configuration Menu Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Calling for Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Control Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Film Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Agency Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Kodak Dryview 8300 Laser Imaging Film . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Spectral Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Automatic Image Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Less Impact on the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Storage and Handling of Undeveloped Film . . . . . . . 6-3
Handling of Developed Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Archivability of Developed Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 xi


User Guide

Description Page
Exposure to Moisture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Odor Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Heat Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Film Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imager – Operator Training 1

xii 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Introduction

Introduction

Introducing the Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imager


The Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imager (8300 Laser Imager) is a continuous tone
imager with an integrated photothermographic film developer. The imager produces
high-quality monochrome images, using an optical laser scanning system, a data
control system that manages external data flow, and a film developer.
The imager uses 8 x 10-inch (20.3 × 25.4 cm) Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imaging
Film. There are 100 sheets of film per package.
The imager produces the first print in approximately 110 seconds, and subsequent
prints at 55 prints per hour.
Image data can be either digital or analog. The imager can produce up to six images
on a single film sheet. It can also produce output from more than one user.
The imager acquires, formats and prints images using a control panel on the imager,
a remote keypad, and/or via modality host control.

Optional
SCSI MO Drive

Figure 1-1. Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imager

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 1-1


User Guide

How the 8300 Laser Imager Works


Each time the imager receives a print command, it prints an image using the
following sequence.

Note
The circled numbers in Figure 1-2 match the sequence steps. Dashed lines
show the film path.

1. Feed film – The feed area drives a sheet of film from the supply tray and feeds it
into the separation rollers.
2. Separate film – The separation rollers check for more than one sheet, then drive
a single sheet of film into the exposure module.
3. Expose film – A laser beam exposes the film. The film is then guided into the
film developer.
4. Develop film – The film develops as it passes over the heated developer drum.
5. Check image quality – The film is routed from the film developer, through the
densitometer, and out to the receive tray. (The next paragraph describes the role
of the densitometer in image quality control.)

Figure 1-2. Print Sequence

1-2 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Introduction

Automatic Image Quality Control


The densitometer is a key element in the Automatic Image Quality Control (AIQC)
process. The densitometer enables the imager to automatically adjust image
processing parameters to produce the best image. The imager adjusts these
parameters each time it prints a calibration film.
A calibration film is printed when:
• The 8300 Laser Imager is powered on.
• The film tray is inserted in the imager.
• A calibration film is requested from the setup menu.
• The imager has not been used for 8 hours, and any type of print is
requested.
• The imager reactivates from Energy Saver mode.

Note
If the Energy Saver mode is activated, the 8300 Laser Imager shuts down its
heaters and motors after 3 hours of inactivity. Any button pressed reactivates
the imager to automatically warm up to operating temperature. Also, the
imager reactivates if it is sent an image. A calibration film prints once the
imager reaches operating temperature.

Systems Connecting to the 8300 Laser Imager


The 8300 Laser Imager can be connected to a wide variety of image generating
modalities such as C-ARM, Ultrasound, and Nuclear Medicine.

C-ARM
C-ARM is a portable X-ray machine that can image on standard X-ray film or operate
in “fluoro” mode. Standard components include the C-ARM machine, patient table
(rotating table), and optional image monitor cart.
In fluoro mode, X-rays are emitted in continuous or pulsed mode and collected by an
image intensifier after passing through the patient. A TV camera records the images
and the video signal is then sent to a viewing monitor for real time display.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 1-3


User Guide

C-ARMs are typically used in surgery and emergency rooms outside of radiology.
Typical surgery uses are during orthopedic procedures for checking pin placements
and joint orientations, and for neuro procedures for guiding to tumors.
A version of C-ARMs is used in urology for prostate and/or bladder surgery. The
urology system differs from a standard C-ARM very little. A different table
configuration exists with stirrups and surgeon seating areas. Various software
differences are also present.

Ultrasound
The Ultrasound system produces images using high-frequency sound waves. When
these sound waves come into contact with structures within the body, part of the
sound energy is reflected back to the body surface where it is converted
electronically into a picture. This technique is commonly used during pregnancy to
determine if multiple fetuses are present or the position and age of a fetus.
An echocardiogram is a useful ultrasonic technique to examine patients with
congenital or acquired heart conditions, and the Doppler ultrasound detects blood
flow in the veins and arteries in the body.
Work is usually performed by radiologists or medical specialists for diagnostic
purposes in hospitals and imaging centers.

Nuclear Medicine
The use of isotopic or radioactive tracers to diagnose or treat disease is the branch
of radiology known as nuclear medicine. Tiny amounts of compounds “tagged” with
radioactive isotopes are introduced into the body either orally or by injection into a
vein. These substances travel through the bloodstream to the specific organ or type
of tissue being evaluated. The radiation released by the isotopes is detected by
devices called scintillation cameras. Computers convert the data from these
cameras to images that allow visualization of parts of organs not usually seen by
normal X-rays.
By tracking how and where the radioactive compounds travel, the nuclear medicine
physician is able to gain information about biological processes, such as in a heart
scan which determines if any areas of the heart are not receiving sufficient amounts
of blood. Also, a therapeutic dose of radiation can be delivered to a specific organ
for treatment, for example, radioactive iodine for thyroid disorders.
Another type of Nuclear Medicine is the Conventional system which uses gamma
camera without computers to create images from injection of radio-isotopes in a
static fashion.

1-4 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Introduction

Service and Installation


U.S. Connection: 120 volts, line to neutral
Only factory trained personnel are authorized to install and service the 8300 Laser
Imager. Circuit drawings are made available to the service technician.

! Warning

J1 (input/output) is intended for interconnection to equipment that complies


with the appropriate IEC 601-1/IEC 601-1-1 harmonized national standards
when interconnected.

IMPORTANT NOTICE TO PURCHASER


Kodak warrants that the Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imager will be free from
defects in parts, material and manufacture for the period of one (1) year from the
date of installation. For defects occurring during the warranty period and about which
Kodak has received notice during the warranty period, Kodak will provide Buyer with
free replacement parts and labor to replace warranty-covered items.
THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER PRODUCT WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND THOSE ARISING FROM A
COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE.
The express warranty does not apply to the following: expendable parts; defects or
damage incurred in transportation to the end-user; defects or damage due to
neglect, misuse, operator error, improper installation or alteration of the 8300 Laser
Imaging System; or operation of the 8300 Laser Imaging System out of specification.
EXCEPT FOR THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY STATED ABOVE, KODAK IS NOT
LIABLE FOR DIRECT DAMAGES. KODAK WILL NOT IN ANY EVENT BE LIABLE
FOR INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, REGARDLESS
OF THE LEGAL THEORY ASSERTED, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE AND STRICT
LIABILITY.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 1-5


User Guide

BLANK PAGE

1-6 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Controls and Indicators

Controls and Indicators

Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imager Controls – Main


The Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imager (8300 Laser imager) uses the following
controls. The numbered descriptions below correspond to the numbered callouts in
Figure 2-1.
1. Local Panel – Uses a two-line display with 40 characters per line to provide
status, setup, and test information. The panel contains six function buttons and a
numeric keypad. (See page 2-2 for details.)
2. Film Saver – Inserted over the film tray to prevent exposure of the film when the
film tray is temporarily removed from the 8300 Laser Imager.
3. Manual Film Tray Release button – Allows the film tray to be removed without
the imager being powered on. Insert the film saver before using this button or the
film will be exposed.
4. Power Switch – Controls power to the imager.
5. Remote Keypad– Displays control settings for the imager and allows you to
adjust these settings. (See page 2-3 for details.) This keypad is an option and
will not be used in all applications.

1 Optional
SCSI MO Drive

5 4 3 2

Figure 2-1. 8300 Laser Imager – Controls and Indicators

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 2-1


User Guide

Local Panel Controls and Indicators


The numbered descriptions correspond to the numbered callouts in Figure 2-2.
1. Display – A two-line, alphanumeric display that provides status, setup, and test
information on the imager.
• Schedule PM: Displays when the user should place a service call for
preventative maintenance to be performed on the imager.
• Supply= xx: If enabled, displays the number of films in the film tray.
• Supply=? xx: If enabled, displays the number of films the imager thinks are
left in the film tray.
2. A and B Setup (buttons) – Selects one of the two input modules for parameter
setup or changes.
3. Test (button) – Accesses the test menu.
4. Down and Up Arrows (buttons) – Scrolls the display and moves the display
cursor, when present.
5. Exit (button) – Allows user to exit any menu or local panel operation.
6. Enter (button) – Accepts entry. Executes commands or advances menu.
7. Numeric Keypad (buttons) – Allows you to enter numeric information.
8. Clear (button) – Clears (deletes) entries.

A. DIGITAL READY SYSTEM READY


B. ANALOG READY SCHEDULE PM SUPPLY= XX

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Figure 2-2. Local Panel Controls

2-2 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Controls and Indicators

(Optional) Remote Keypad Controls and Indicators


The numbered descriptions below correspond to the numbered callouts in
Figure 2-3.
1. Imager Ready (indicator) – When illuminated, indicates that the imager is
operational.
2. Check Imager (indicator) – Flashes to indicate a fault or out of film condition.
An associated error message is displayed on the local panel.
3. Memory Full (indicator) – When illuminated, indicates that there is insufficient
memory available to acquire another image. This condition is only reported to the
user whose image memory area is full. The condition should automatically
correct itself as the imager prints films and frees memory space.

1
4

Imager Check Memory


9 Ready Imager Full

Images Format
Acquired Selected 5
10

Erase Select
6
Press PRINT for ADDITIONAL copy

8
Print
7

Acquire

Figure 2-3. Remote Keypad (Optional)

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 2-3


User Guide

4. Format Selected (indicator) – Displays the number of images (1, 2, 4, or 6) to


be printed on one sheet of film.
5. Select (button) – Selects the number of images to be printed on one sheet of
film. Sequences the Format Selected indicator through 1, 2, 4, and 6.
6. Print (button) – Prints the selected image(s). Pressing this button while the
PRESS PRINT for ADDITIONAL copy indicator is illuminated prints another
copy of the selected image(s).
7. Acquire (button) – Acquires images.
8. Press PRINT for ADDITIONAL copy (indicator) – When illuminated, indicates
that a print is developing and indicates that you can create an additional print if
you press the Print button while the indicator is illuminated.
9. Images Acquired (indicator) – Indicates the number of images acquired to be
printed on one sheet of film. The indicator only displays a number less than or
equal to the number displayed by the Format Selected indicator.

Note
If the imager is in the Autoprint mode, the print cycle begins automatically when
the number in the Images Acquired indicator equals the number in the Format
Selected indicator. When the number in the Images Acquired indicator is less
than the Format Selected indicator, you can press the Print button to start
printing.

10. Erase (button) – Deletes images in the reverse order that they were acquired;
the last image acquired is the first deleted. As images are deleted, the Images
Acquired indicator decrements.

2-4 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Controls and Indicators

System Setup
The 8300 Laser Imager provides setup menus that can be used to configure the
system by adjusting the default settings (parameters) that control functions such as
printing or image density. Default settings are the values that apply when you switch
on the imager.

Note
When your imager is installed, it is set up to work for your environment, so you
should rarely need to access and change the default function settings.

The parameter function menus available on a particular imager differ according to


the type of input to the system. Imager input options are classified as:
• Digital
• Analog
• Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
• Network
The parameters for each of these system types are listed on the following two
pages. A menu is available for each listed parameter. (Submenus can be accessed
from the main parameter menu.)
After the parameter list on the following pages, sequence flow charts of the main
parameter menus are provided. The flow charts include references to descriptions of
the menus provided alphabetically in Table 2-1 at the end of this section.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 2-5


User Guide

Main Parameter Lists for Each Imager Type

Digital, Analog, SCSI Target SCSI Initiator (Disk Not in Drive)


1. Density 1. User Number and Parameter
2. Contrast 1. Number B&W Copies
3. Print Contrast Samples 2. Number Color Copies
4. Sharp/Smooth 3. Density
5. Polarity 4. Contrast
6. Number of Copies 5. Sharp/Smooth
7. Autoprint 6. Polarity
8. Film Layout 7. Print Option
1. Format 8. B&W Format
2. Mode 9. Color Format
9. Keypad Format 10. Film Layout
10. Audible Alarm 11. Film Numbering
11. Exposure Index 12. Autoprint
12. Perform Calibration 13. Print Aspect Ratio
13. Date/Time 2. Exposure Index
3. Perform Calibration
4. Date/Time

SCSI Initiator (Disk in Drive, Aegis


Uninitialized)
1. User Number
2. Print Contrast Samples
3. Contrast

2-6 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Controls and Indicators

Main Parameter Lists for Each Imager Type (Continued)

SCSI Initiator (Disk in Drive, Initialized Aegis Format or Another


Acceptable Format, with Autoprint OFF)
1. First Exam Number to Print
2. First Film to Print B&W = Color =
3. Last Exam Number to Print
4. Last Film to Print B&W = Color =
5. Ready to Print
6. User Number and Parameters
1. Number of B&W Films
2. Number of Color Copies
3. Density
4. Print Contrast Samples
5. Contrast
6. Sharp/Smooth
7. Polarity
8. Print Option
9. B&W Format
10. Color Format
11. Film Layout
12. Film Numbering
13. Print Aspect Ratio
7. Reinitialize Aegis Station ID
1. User Number
2. Print Contrast Samples
3. Contrast

Network
1. Configure Client Defaults
1. Density
2. Contrast
3. Request Contrast Samples
4. Sharp/Smooth
5. Polarity
2. Exposure Index
3. Perform Calibration
4. Date/Time

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 2-7


User Guide

General Setup Menus for Digital, Analog, or SCSI Target Systems

1. Density
See page 2-19 8. Film Layout
See page 2-19
2. Contrast
See page 2-19 1. Format
Print Contrast See page 2-20
3.
Samples
See page 2-22 2. Mode
See page 2-21
4. Sharp/Smooth
See page 2-24
9. Keypad Format
5. Polarity See page 2-20
See page 2-22
10. Audible Alerts
6. Number of Copies See page 2-17
See page 2-21
11. Exposure Index
7. Autoprint See page 2-19
See page 2-18 Perform
12.
Calibration
See page 2-21

13. Date/Time
See page 2-19

2-8 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Controls and Indicators

Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) Menus


SCSI menus are used for setting up an internal Magneto-Optical drive, an external
Magneto-Optical drive, an external Bernoulli drive, or a color printer (currently, color
printing is not supported). The menus differ depending on whether:
• A disk is present in the drive
• The disk is Aegis-formatted only or contains an acceptable non-Aegis format
• The Aegis disk is initialized
• The Autoprint parameter is set to ON or OFF
• You are setting up default parameter values (Disk Not in Drive) or temporary
values (Disk in Drive)
The conditions listed above determine which menu appears. Parameter values can
be temporary or permanent.
The SCSI Setup Menu (Disk Not in Drive) is used to store default parameters for a
particular user number.
The SCSI Operational Setup Menu (Disk in Drive) is used when a temporary change
to a parameter is required for that printing session. Once the disk is removed, all
parameter values will return to the default value.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 2-9


User Guide

SCSI Setup Menu (Disk Not in Drive – for Changes to Default Parameter
Values)
Configure or adjust these menu parameters before you insert a disk into the disk
drive attached to the SCSI Input Module. (To access this menu, the system must
have been set to SCSI Initiator by the installing technician.) When a disk is not in the
drive, changes to default values will be stored permanently for each user number.

1. User Number
8. B&W Format
See page 2-24
See page 2-18
Number B&W
1.
Copies 9. Color Format
See page 2-21
See page 2-18
Number Color
2. Copies 10. Film Layout
See page 2-21
See page 2-19
3. Density
11. Film Numbering
See page 2-19
See page 2-19
4. Contrast
See page 2-19
12. Autoprint
See page 2-18
5. Sharp/Smooth Print Aspect
13.
See page 2-24 Ratio
See page 2-22
6. Polarity
See page 2-22
2. Exposure Index
See page 2-19
7. Print Option Perform
3.
See page 2-23 Calibration
See page 2-21

4. Date/Time
See page 2-19

2-10 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Controls and Indicators

SCSI Operational Setup Menus (Disk in Drive)


When the software determines that a disk is present in a SCSI drive connected to
the SCSI input module, the SCSI operational setup parameters automatically
appear, if Autoprint is OFF.

Note
As soon as a disk is inserted into a SCSI drive, the imager starts to read the
disk header information. With Autoprint ON, the imager continues reading the
image data on the disk, then prints the images. With Autoprint OFF, the imager
will allow you to make changes to selected parameters. However, those
changes are temporary and will apply to only that disk and the current image
printing session.

The parameters appear in the order shown in the menus below. The conditions that
control whether the menu is displayed are listed at the start of each menu.

SCSI Operational Setup Menu (Disk in Drive, Aegis Uninitialized)


If the SCSI disk is Aegis-formatted but the Aegis station parameters are not
assigned, the following menus appear:

1. User Number
See page 2-24

Print Contrast
2.
Samples
See page 2-22

3. Contrast
See page 2-19

SCSI Operational Setup Menu (Disk in Drive, Aegis Initialized, Autoprint OFF)
If an Aegis-formatted disk or a non-Aegis but acceptable formatted disk is initialized,
and Autoprint is set to OFF, the menus shown on the next page appear.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 2-11


User Guide

1. First Exam
Number to Print
See page 2-20 7. Polarity
See page 2-22
2. First Film to Print
B&W= Color=
See page 2-20 8. Print Option
Last Exam See page 2-23
3.
Number to Print
See page 2-20 9. B&W Format
Last Film to Print See page 2-18
4.
B&W= Color=
See page 2-20 10. Color Format
See page 2-18
5. Ready to Print
See page 2-24 11. Film Layout
See page 2-19
6. User Number
See page 2-24
12. Film Numbering
See page 2-19
Number of B&W
1.
Copies Print Aspect
See page 2-21 13.
Ratio
Number of Color See page 2-22
2. Copies
See page 2-21
7. Re-Initialize Aegis
Station ID (Aegis only)
3. Density See page 2-24
See page 2-19

4. Print Contrast 1. User Number


Samples
See page 2-24
See page 2-22

5. Contrast 2. Print Contrast


Samples
See page 2-19 See page 2-22

6. Sharp/Smooth
3. Contrast
See page 2-24
See page 2-19

2-12 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Controls and Indicators

Network Menus

1. Configure Client
Defaults
See page 2-18

1. Density
See page 2-19

2. Contrast
See page 2-19

Request Contrast
3.
Samples
See page 2-24

4. Sharp/Smooth
See page 2-24

5. Polarity
See page 2-22

2. Exposure Index
See page 2-19

3. Perform
Calibration
See page 2-21

4. Date/Time
See page 2-19

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 2-13


User Guide

Menu Buttons
Use the following buttons to access and change parameter menus:
1. A Setup (button) or B Setup (button) – Selects an input menu for setup.
2. Down Arrow (button) – Scrolls to the next parameter menu. From the last
menu, scrolls to the first menu.
3. Up Arrow (button) – Scrolls to the previous parameter menu. From the first
menu, scrolls to the last menu.
4. Enter (button) – After you access a parameter menu, opens an editable display.
When you enter a new value for a parameter, pressing the Enter button enters
the new value for the parameter.
5. Exit (button) – Cancels changes entered in an editable display and restores the
original values or settings. Continued pressing allows quick exit of setup function.
6. Clear (button) – Clears an incorrect entry. If you enter values that are out of
range for a display, an audible signal sounds. To delete the incorrect value, press
the Clear button.

1 2 3 5 4 6

Figure 2-4. Menu Buttons

2-14 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Controls and Indicators

Menu Format
Parameter menus display information about the menu and the parameter.
The first menu for each parameter:
• Displays the menu number
• Identifies the parameter
• Lists the current value for the parameter
• Identifies the current input module selected
• Provides information about changing the parameter and continuing to the next
menu.
Subsequent menus tell you:
• What to enter
• The range of possible values for the parameter
A sample parameter menu and the general procedure used to change a parameter
are listed next.

Information Menu Current Input


Line Number Parameter Value Module

Action Line

Figure 2-5. Parameter Menu Display

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 2-15


User Guide

Parameter Menu Change Procedure


To change an individual parameter:
A B
1. Select an input module by pressing either Setup or Setup on the local panel.

2. Access the desired parameter menu by using or to scroll the list. (The
location of each parameter in the sequence of menus is shown earlier in this
section.)

3. When the correct parameter is displayed, press Enter to access the parameter’s
change menus.
You may find that you need to change information in a series of menus. Each
menu display contains an Information line (upper line) and an Action line
(lower), which tells you how to change the parameter and how to continue.
4. Use the arrow buttons or the numeric keypad to change the value and then
continue to the next menu as instructed.

Note
If you enter a value that is out of range, the imager beeps. Clear the entry by
pressing the Clear button (see step 5) and re-entering the value.

5. When you have made changes to a menu, press one of the following buttons to
exit the menu:

• To accept the changes and exit to the previous menu, press Enter .

• To cancel the changes and exit to the previous menu with the original values
displayed, press Exit
.

• To delete a change and re-enter values for a parameter, press Clear . (This
key does not exit from the current menu).
Each parameter menu is listed in alphabetical order in Table 2-1.

2-16 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Controls and Indicators

Parameter Menu Table


Table 2-1. Parameter Menus

Parameter Menu Description

Aegis Initialized or Other Prints the films automatically when the disk is
Formats inserted in the drive.
SCSI Device Only Conditions are:
1. SCSI device has a disk in the drive.
2. Disk is Aegis-formatted or has an
acceptable non-Aegis format.
3. Disk is initialized.
4. Autoprint is set to ON.

Aegis Station Parameters Tells you that entered parameters have been used to
Assigned assign a station ID.
SCSI Device Only

Aegis Station Parameters Displays when you need to assign station parameters
Not Assigned such as user number and contrast setting.
SCSI Device Only Conditions are:
1. SCSI device has a disk in the drive.
2. Disk is Aegis-formatted.
3. Aegis station parameters are not
assigned.
Press Enter to assign station parameters.

Audible Alerts – Provides a “one beep” indication at the keypad for


each successful image acquisition.
– Provides “three short beeps” at the keypad to alert
the operator that image acquisition has failed.
Retry another image acquisition.
Selections:
ON = Alarm sounds
OFF = No alarm sounds
(This parameter applies only to the optional keypad.)

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 2-17


User Guide

Parameter Menu Description

Autoprint Determines whether the imager prints images as


soon as the Images Acquired and Format Selected
indicators display the same value, or as soon as a
SCSI disk is inserted into the disk drive.
Selections:
ON:
Prints when the Images Acquired and
Format Selected indicator display the
same value.
To print fewer images than indicated by the
Format Selected indicator, press Print
as soon as Images Acquired shows the
number of copies you want.
Prints all available images stored on a SCSI
disk as soon as the images are read.
OFF:
Prints only when you press the Print button.
Note: To print contrast samples, Autoprint must be
set to OFF.
(This parameter applies only to the optional keypad.)

B&W Format Selects the number of images that will be printed on


each film.

Client ID Uniquely identifies client on a machine. Consists of:


S DICOM Application Entity Title
S Network IP address of the machine
sending the information

Color Format Selects the number of images that will be printed on


each color print.

Configure Client Defaults Uniquely identifies client on a machine. Consists of:


S DICOM Application Entity Title
S Network IP address of the machine
sending the information

2-18 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Controls and Indicators

Parameter Menu Description

Contrast Controls the amount of contrast in an image. Contrast


is the difference between the lighter and darker areas
of an image.
Range: 1 to 12
Use the contrast samples to choose the best value
and enter the number for that value.

Date/Time Changes date and time.


Press Enter to access each part of the date in turn or
the time.
A blinking cursor identifies the current value for each
part of the date or time.
Either use the numeric keypad to enter a new value,
or use the arrow buttons to change the value
displayed (such as the month or the year).

Density Controls the density of the image.


Range: 1 to 16
1 = Lightest density
16 = Darkest density

Exposure Index This setting is for service only. Do not change.

Film Layout Allows you to select format and mode. (See those
entries in this table.)
(This parameter applies only to the optional keypad.)

Film Numbering When activated, prints a film number and exam


SCSI Device Only number on each film.
Selections:
ON: Prints a film number and exam number on
each film.
OFF: Does not print numbers on each film.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 2-19


User Guide

Parameter Menu Description

First Exam Number to Specifies which exam to start printing (defaults to the
Print first non-printed page). Menu displays only if
SCSI Device only Autoprint is set to OFF.

First Film to Print Specifies which film to start printing (defaults to the
B&W= Color= first non-printed page). Menu displays only if
SCSI Device Only Autoprint is set to OFF.

Format Determines the number of images that print on a


single sheet of film.

Keypad Format Determines the default number that displays on the


Format Selected indicator. The Format parameter
controls the number of images that print on a single
sheet of film.
Range: 1, 2, 4, and 6
If you change this value at the keypad, the new value
is not retained when you switch off the imager. When
the imager is switched on again, the default value
present before the manual change will be
re-displayed.
(This parameter applies only to the optional keypad.)

Last Exam Number to Specifies which exam to stop printing (defaults to the
Print last non-printed image).
SCSI Device Only

Last Film to Print Specifies which film to stop printing (defaults to the
B&W= Color= last non-printed image).
SCSI Device Only

2-20 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Controls and Indicators

Parameter Menu Description

Mode Allows setting printed mode to Portrait or


Landscape.

Selections:

Portrait Landscape

Number of B&W Copies Specifies the number of black and white images to
SCSI Device Only print.
Range: 1 to 99

Number of Color Copies Specifies the number of color images to print.


Range: 1 to 99
SCSI Device Only The Sony UP-D70000 color printer only accepts 20
copies per command.

Number of Copies Changes the number of copies printed.


Range: 1 to 99
(This parameter applies only to the optional keypad.)

Perform Calibration Prints a calibration step wedge using current settings,


then calibrates the densitometer.
Press Enter to start the calibration.
If a problem occurs during calibration, the imager
displays an error message. Refer to Troubleshooting,
Table 4-1, for information on how to deal with the
problem.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 2-21


User Guide

Parameter Menu Description

Polarity Determines whether image is printed as a positive or


negative.
Selections:
POSITIVE:
If the acquired image is positive, prints a
positive image; if negative, prints negative.
NEGATIVE:
Reverses the acquired print (a positive
acquired image is printed as a negative, and
a negative as a positive).

Print Aspect Ratio Defines printed image size relative to horizontal and
vertical size requirements.
SCSI Device Only Range: 0.50 to 2.00

Print Contrast Samples Prints contrast samples (uses the last acquired image
for the sample, and current density and contrast
settings).
To print samples, press Enter.
Digital and Analog Device
Only During printing, print progress is indicated. If no fault
appears during printing, returns to the Print Contrast
Samples menu. To stop printing, press Exit.

Print Contrast Prints the first image on the disk using the current
Samples density and contrast settings. This image is used for
SCSI Device Only contrast selection.
Note: To print contrast samples, Autoprint must be
set to OFF.
To print samples, press Enter.
During printing, print progress is indicated. If no fault
appears during printing, returns to the Print Contrast
Samples menu. To stop printing, press Exit.

2-22 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Controls and Indicators

Parameter Menu Description

Printing Exam # and Displays this message when automatically printing


Film # (B&W) the black-and-white films for each exam.
SCSI Device Only Black-and-white films are always printed first,
regardless of exam number order.
Multiple copies are printed in sequence (copy number
is controlled by the COPY command).

Printing Exam # and Displays this message when automatically printing


Color # color prints after a disk is inserted in the drive.
SCSI Device Only If the disk contains both black-and-white and color
images, the black-and-white images are always
printed first. If a color printer is connected, the B&W
images will print on the 8300 Laser Imager and the
color images will print on the color printer,
simultaneously.

Printing Cancelled by Displays this message when user cancels printing. Is


Operator displayed only if Autoprint is set to ON.
SCSI Device Only

Print Option Specifies whether to print all images on a disk or just


new images.
SCSI Device Only The 8300 Laser Imager keeps a record of all images
that have been printed. When you reuse a disk, new
acquired images are appended to the old images (as
long as there is room).
Selections:
NEW ONLY:
Prints only newly acquired images that have
not yet been printed.
ALL:
Prints all images on a disk, including those
that were already printed.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 2-23


User Guide

Parameter Menu Description

Ready to Print If the Enter key is pressed, printing will start. When
the disk is finished printing, it is automatically
released from the drive.
SCSI Device Only

Reinitialize Aegis Station Re-assigns station parameters such as user number


ID (Aegis only) and contrast setting.
SCSI Device Only

Request Contrast Prints contrast samples (uses the last acquired image
Samples for the sample, and current density and contrast
settings).
To print samples, press Enter.
Network Only During printing, print progress is indicated.

Sharp/Smooth Determines the sharpness or smoothness of the


printed image. Smooths out the jagged edges of the
pixels in an image as specified.
Selections:
Range: 1 to 6 or Auto
1 = Sharpest image
6 = Smoothest image
Auto = The imager determines the
best setting for the size of the image.
Current setting is marked by an asterisk (*).

User Number Indicates the user number of the disk.


SCSI Device Only Is accessible only if Autoprint is set to OFF.
Range: 1 to 20

User Number and Allows selection of parameter settings such as


Parameters density and contrast for each known user number
SCSI Device Only before SCSI disk is inserted into the drive for printing.
Range: 1 to 20

2-24 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Operation and Maintenance

Operation and Maintenance

System Power Up
Set the Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imager (8300 Laser Imager) power switch to
ON. The following sequence occurs:
1. The imager performs a series of self-diagnostic tests.
2. When the self-test is successful, the machine warms up for about 25 minutes.
3. After warmup, the machine calibrates the densitometer lamp.
4. After calibrating the densitometer lamp, the machine prints a film calibration step
wedge.

Note
The system displays a message for each of the preceding stages of system
power up.

5. When the imager is ready, a 1/2-second beep sounds at the remote keypad(s).

Local
Panel Optional
SCSI MO Drive

Remote Power
Keypad Switch

Figure 3-1. Power Switch, Local Panel and Optional Remote Keypad

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 3-1


User Guide

Producing a Print from a Host Modality


After warmup and calibration, the 8300 Laser Imager is ready to print. Print
commands are issued and controlled from the host modality.

Producing a Print Using the Optional Keypad

Note
The following procedure does not apply if the 8300 Laser Imager is being used
in a DICOM network.

1. Power on the imager.


2. Wait for the green Imager Ready (1) indicator to illuminate.
3. Press Select (2) repeatedly until the desired number appears on the Format
Selected indicator (3).

Note
You can select a format only if no images are acquired or all acquired images
are printed.

4. To start image acquisition, press Acquire (4) or use the optional foot activated
switch (Foot Switch).
• If acquisition is successful, the Images Acquired (5) indicator increments
with a short beep.
• If acquisition is unsuccessful:
– The audible alarm of “three short beeps” sounds (if set to ON).
– The Images Acquired (5) indicator does not increment.
– The Check Imager (6) indicator lights.
– An associated message appears on the local panel.

Note
The failure indication is only visible at the keypad where acquisition was
unsuccessful. After an unsuccessful attempt, you should try to acquire an
image again. If the acquire is successful, the Check Imager (6) indicator turns
off and the Images Acquired (5) indicator increments and one short beep is
sounded.

3-2 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Operation and Maintenance

5. Repeat step 4 until all images are acquired.

Note
To delete images, do it in reverse order. Starting with the most recently
acquired image, press the Erase button (7). The Images Acquired (5) indicator
decrements as the images are deleted.

6. To print the images acquired at any time, press the Print button (8). Any blank
image locations are printed at background density.

1 10
Imager Check Memory
Ready Imager Full

5 Images Format
3
Acquired Selected
2
7
Erase Select
9 8
Press PRINT for ADDITIONAL copy

Print 4

Acquire

Figure 3-2. Optional Keypad

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 3-3


User Guide

Note
If Autoprint is ON, images also print when the number in the Images Acquired
indicator (5) equals the number in the Format Selected indicator (3).

Note
The number of images printed is determined by the Number of Copies
to Print setting.

7. To print additional copies, press Print (8) whenever the Press PRINT for
ADDITIONAL copy indicator (9) is illuminated. Each button press prints one
additional copy.

Note
If the Memory Full indicator (10) lights, wait until the indicator goes out before
pressing Acquire again.

Note
If the Check Imager indicator (6) lights with no associated beep when the
acquisitions are successful, there is a condition such as out of film, or film jam
at the imager, which is not currently affecting acquisitions.

Note
If a film jam occurs during printing, the Check Imager indicator (6) lights, and
the local panel displays an associated message. Clear the jam (see page 4-10,
Troubleshooting, for instructions). When the jam is cleared, the machine
restarts the print sequence.

3-4 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Operation and Maintenance

10
1 Imager Check Memory
Ready Imager Full

3
Images Format
5 Acquired Selected
2
7
Erase Select
9
8
Press PRINT for ADDITIONAL copy

Print
4

Acquire

Figure 3-3. Optional Keypad

Requesting Contrast Samples and Changing the Contrast Setting


The user can adjust both density and contrast for printed images, as shown on the
following pages. The density setting is incremental, which means that the maximum
density of a printed image increases as the number of the density setting is
increased.
The contrast setting is not incremental. The user must select a desired setting from
contrast examples of a printed image. You must select the procedure to print
contrast samples for the modality that you are using.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 3-5


User Guide

Digital or Analog Modalities with Host Control

Note
A modality with host control capabilities usually defines and sends the density
and contrast information to the imager when the image data is sent, overriding
the values set at the imager’s local panel. If the modality does not send density
and contrast information, the user can define the settings at the local panel.

1. At the host, acquire an image, but do not send a print command.


A B
2. On the imager local panel, press Setup or Setup (see Figure 3-4) to select the
menu that represents the host-controlled modality from which you will print
contrast samples.

3. Press to go to item 3, Print Contrast Samples, and then press Enter .

(The 8300 Laser Imager automatically prints 12 copies of the previously acquired
image at different contrasts.)
4. Select the image that you prefer, and note the image number associated with it.

5. On the local panel, press the to go to item 2, Contrast.

6. Following the instructions on the display, change the contrast setting to the
number previously selected from the contrast samples, then press Enter .

7. After setting the contrast, press Exit


to return the imager to service.

2 3 5 7 3 6

Figure 3-4. Menu Buttons

3-6 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Operation and Maintenance

Digital or Analog Modalities with Remote Keypad


1. On the modality, select and display the image you want to use for printing
contrast samples.
2. On the imager remote keypad, select a format other than 1. (For example, use
2, 4, or 6.)

3. Press Acquire
on the keypad.

A B
4. On the imager local panel, press Setup or Setup to select the menu that
represents the host-controlled modality from which you print contrast samples.

5. Press to go to item 3, Print Contrast Samples, and then press Enter .


(The 8300 Laser Imager automatically prints 12 copies of the previously acquired
image at different contrasts.)
6. Select the image that you prefer, and note the image number associated with it.

7. On the local panel, press the to go to item 2, Contrast.

8. Following the instructions on the display, change the contrast setting to the
number previously selected from the contrast samples, then press Enter .

9. After setting the contrast, press Exit


to return the imager to service.

10. Press Erase on the keypad to delete the previously acquired image.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 3-7


User Guide

SCSI (M/O or Bernoulli Disks)

Note
The 8300 Laser Imager prints contrast samples of the first image on a disk that
is inserted into its drive. Autoprint must be disabled first in order to request
contrast samples for the user number of the disk.

1. Make sure that there is no disk in the drive(s), and the imager is ready:

A B
2. On the imager local panel, press Setup or Setup to select the desired SCSI drive,

B
then press Enter . (For the example display shown in step 1, Setup would be
selected.)
3. Select the user number of the disk to be used for contrast sample printing, and
press Enter to confirm the selection.

4. Press to go to menu item 12. When Autoprint appears, follow the


instructions on the local panel to ensure that Autoprint is OFF.
5. Insert the disk with the image that will be used to print contrast samples.
(Once the disk is accepted, First Exam Number to Print appears on the local
panel.)

6. Press to go to menu item 6 where User Number and Parameters appears,

then press Enter .

7. Once the User Number of the disk appears on the display, press Enter to accept
the number.

8. Press to go to menu item 4. When Print Contrast Samples appears,

press Enter to begin the printing. (The imager automatically prints 12 copies of
the first image on the disk at different contrasts.)

3-8 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Operation and Maintenance

9. Select the image you prefer, and note the image number associated with it.

10. Press Exit Exit


and follow instructions on the display to release the disk and return
to Ready.
A B
11. With the disk removed, press Setup or Setup to select the desired SCSI drive, then

press Enter .

12. On the local panel, press to go to menu item 4, Contrast.

13. Follow the instructions on the display to change the default contrast setting to the
number previously selected from the contrast samples, and press Enter .

14. After setting the contrast, press to go to menu item 12, Autoprint.

15. Follow the instructions on the local panel to enable Autoprint back on.

16. After enabling Autoprint, press Exit Exit


to return the imager to Ready.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 3-9


User Guide

Network (DICOM) Connections

Note
A modality with DICOM control usually defines and sends the density and
contrast information to the imager when the image data is sent, overriding the
values set at the imager’s local panel. If the modality does not send density
and contrast information, the user can define the settings at the local panel.

A
1. On the imager local panel, press Setup for the menu that represents the network
connection.

2. Press Enter when the Configure Client Defaults menu appears.

3. Press to find the desired client address from which you want samples, then

press Enter .

4. Press to go to menu item 3. When Request Contrast Samples appears,

press Enter to select the request, then press Enter to complete the request.

5. Select and send a desired image for printing contrast samples from the network
client workstation. (The imager automatically prints 12 copies of the image sent
by the network client at different contrasts.)
6. Select the image that you prefer, and note the image number associated with it.

7. On the local panel, press the to go to item 2, Contrast.

8. Follow the instructions on the display to change the contrast setting to the
number previously selected from the contrast samples, and press Enter .

9. After setting the contrast, press Exit Exit Exit


to return the imager to service.

3-10 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Operation and Maintenance

Loading/Unloading the Film Tray

Note
Leave the 8300 Laser Imager on while loading or unloading the film tray. If you
remove power from the imager while the system is in use, any previously
acquired unprinted images in memory will be lost.

1. When 100 sheets of Kodak DryView Laser Imaging Film have been used, the
film tray unlocks automatically, and instructions for tray removal are displayed on
the local panel. Remove the tray completely (see Figure 3-5).
2. Swing open the handle of the film tray.
3. Important: Remove the old film insert from the tray and dispose of it.
4. Press the film package down in the tray as follows: Press the film package to the
left, against the soft guide, with the black plastic bag tail lapping through the
handle and the label up. Press down firmly using both hands so the film package
sits flat against the bottom of the tray.
5. Swing the handle of the film tray back in place.
6. Remove the tear strip from the black plastic bag.

Note
Important: Do not install the Film Saver onto the film tray.

7. Slide the tray back into the imager slot.


8. To remove the black plastic bag so the imager can access the Kodak DryView
Laser Imaging Film, pull the black plastic bag tail firmly and smoothly. The entire
film bag should slide out.
9. Dispose of the black plastic bag.

10. To continue processing images, press Enter on the local panel.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 3-11


User Guide

Figure 3-5. Loading/Unloading Film

3-12 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Local Panel and Remote Keypad Message Types


The local panel displays two types of messages:
• Status Messages – Provide information and require no operator action.
• Error Messages – Indicate an error condition inside the Kodak DryView 8300
Laser Imager (8300 Laser Imager). Some messages tell you what action to take
to fix the error, but in some cases a service call is needed to deal with a problem.
If the error message does not clear after you perform the specified action, call for
service.
Table 4-1 lists all messages that can appear on the two lines of the local panel
display:
• The Information Line (line 1) of each display contains the error title and (in most
cases) a two-digit error code.
• The Action Line (line 2) contains additional information/procedures about the
error condition.

Note
The keypad indicates that an error has occurred by flashing the Check Imager
indicator, which refers the operator to the imager’s local panel for more detailed
error information.

Local Panel Messages


If the Operator Action specified in Table 4-1 does not correct the machine problem,
call for service (see page 4-22).
Table 4-1. Operator Related Local Panel Messages
Message Operator Action
ASIC LINE BUFFER FAIL (48) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO power back on. If message reappears, call for
CONTINUE service.
ASIC SELF TEST FAIL (60) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO power back on. If message reappears, call for
CONTINUE service.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 4-1


User Guide

Message Operator Action


A TO D CONVERTER FAILURE (88) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
TURN OFF IMAGER – CALL SERVICE power back on. If message reappears, call for
service.
CALIBRATION FAIL: Dmin HI, Dmax Press Enter. Then stand by while imager
XXX.X (70) PRESS ENTER TO BUILD automatically builds gamma tables. If image
GAMMA TABLES quality is unacceptable, use new film.
CALIBRATION FAILED (69) Press Enter. Then stand by while imager
PRESS ENTER TO LOAD DEFAULT automatically loads default tables. Make sure
GAMMA TABLES to check image quality.
CHECK COLOR PRINTER SCSI A (B) Check to see if the color printer is powered on
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE and ready. Check SCSI connection. Call for
service.
COLOR PRINTER NOT READY INPUT A Check to see why the color printer is not
(B) ready. Check SCSI connection. Check
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE supplies in color printer. Call for service.
DEVELOPER OVER TEMPERATURE Unable to control temperature. Power imager
(17) off, wait 10-20 seconds, then power back on.
TURN OFF IMAGER – CALL SERVICE If message reappears, call for service.
DEVELOPER UNDER TEMPERATURE Unable to control temperature. Power imager
(19) off, wait 10-20 seconds, then power back on.
TURN OFF IMAGER – CALL SERVICE If message reappears, call for service.
DOUBLE FILM FEED – REMOVE Insert the film saver and remove the film tray
MISFEED (24) INSERT FILM SAVER TO (see page 4-10). Clear the misfeed (see page
REMOVE FILM TRAY 4-11). If problem persists, call for service.
DYNAMIC RAM FAILURE (72) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO power back on. If message reappears, call for
CONTINUE service.
ERROR WRITING TO DISK SCSI A (B) Press Enter and retry operation.
(90) PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

FILM TRAPPED INSIDE EXPOSURE Insert the film saver. Raise the cover and
AREA (23) remove the film from the exposure area.
CALL SERVICE – IMAGER IS Close the cover and remove the film saver.
INOPERABLE Press Enter to continue. If film cannot be
removed, call for service.

4-2 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Troubleshooting

Message Operator Action


FILM TRAY EMPTY (29) Imager is out of film. Remove film tray and
INSERT FILM load a new film package.
FILM TRAY UNLOCKED (11) INSERT Remove and reinsert film tray into imager.
FILM TRAY FULLY TO CLEAR ERROR

FLASH EPROM FAILURE (75) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO power back on. If message reappears, call for
CONTINUE service.
GALVANOMETER FAILURE (45) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO power back on. If message reappears, call for
CONTINUE service.
IMAGE MEMORY FOR INPUT A (B) IS Press Enter to continue. As films are printed,
FULL (80) memory will become available.
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

IMAGER OFF-LINE PRESS ENTER TO Press Enter to place imager in service.


PLACE IMAGER IN SERVICE

IMAGER OPEN (16) CLOSE COVER Be sure the top cover is closed and latched.
INPUT A (B) ACQUISITION TIMEOUT Retry image acquire. Check wire connections
(66) from the modality to the imager. If problem
persists, call for service.
INPUT A (B) DMA FAILURE (74) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO power back on. If message reappears, call for
CONTINUE service.
INPUT A (B) FIFO NOT EMPTY FAILURE Reacquire the images to be printed.
(67)

INPUT A (B) HEADER FAILURE (64) Try acquiring an image again. If problem
persists, call for service.
INPUT A (B) IDENTIFY ERROR (63) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO power back on. If message reappears, call for
CONTINUE service.
INPUT A (B) IMAGE SIZES NOT Verify the image is the same size as the
IDENTICAL (35) previously captured image.
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 4-3


User Guide

Message Operator Action


INPUT A (B) IMAGE TOO LARGE TO Maximum image size is 6.1 megabytes. Retry
PRINT (37) PRESS ENTER TO with a smaller image.
CONTINUE

INPUT A (B) OVERFLOW FAILURE (65) Try acquiring an image again. If problem
persists, call for service.
INPUT A (B) PROGRAM MEMORY FULL Press Enter to continue.
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

INPUT A (B) SYNC FAILURE (39) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
power back on. If message reappears, call for
service.
INPUT A (B) UNDERFLOW FAILURE (62) Try acquiring an image again. If problem
persists, call for service.
INPUT A (B) VIDEO LOCK FAILURE (59) Try acquiring an image again. If problem
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO persists, call for service.
CONTINUE

INSERT FILM TRAY (12) Insert film tray.


INSUFFICIENT MEMORY FOR IMAGE Press Enter to continue. As films are printed,
FILE A (B) (81) memory will become available.
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

INSUFFICIENT MEMORY FOR Press Enter to continue. As films are printed,


PRINTSET A (B) (82) PRESS ENTER TO memory will become available.
CONTINUE

INVALID DATA RECEIVED FROM INPUT Call for service.


A (B) (53) PRESS ENTER TO
CONTINUE

LAMP FAILED TO REACH Call for service.


TEMPERATURE (71) PRESS ENTER TO
LOAD DEFAULT GAMMA TABLES

LASER BOARD FAILURE (46) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO power back on. If message reappears, call for
CONTINUE service.
LOADING DEFAULT GAMMA TABLES Automatic operation. Verify image quality.

4-4 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Troubleshooting

Message Operator Action


LOCAL PANEL BUFFER OVERFLOW Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
(85) CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER power back on. If message reappears, call for
TO CONTINUE service.
LOCAL PANEL RAM FAILURE (73) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO power back on. If message reappears, call for
CONTINUE service.
MAXIMUM DENSITY LESS THAN 3.0 No action required.
NO COLOR PLANE MEMORY INPUT A Press Enter and retry operation.
(B) PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

NO EXAM AEGIS FOLDER MODALITY A Press Enter and retry operation.


(B) (94) PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

NO IMAGE ACQUIRED ON INPUT A (B) Reacquire an image.


(68) PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE
NO IMAGE IN STUDY FOLDER SCSI A Press Enter and retry opreation.
(B) (95) PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

NO IMAGES FOUND SCSI A (B) (91) Press Enter and retry operation.
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

NON-VOLATILE CLOCK RAM FAILURE Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
(96) CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER power back on. If message reappears, call for
TO CONTINUE service.
NON-VOLATILE RAM FAILURE (97) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO power back on. If message reappears, call for
CONTINUE service.
NO REQUESTED IMAGES SCSI A (B) Press Enter and retry operation.
(98) PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

NO RESPONSE FROM KEYPAD A (B) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
(78) PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE power back on. If message reappears, call for
service.
NO RESPONSE FROM INPUT A (B) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
power back on. If message reappears, call for
service.
PERFORMING CALIBRATION None.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 4-5


User Guide

Message Operator Action


PERFORMING SELF-TEST None.

POWER DISTRIBUTION FAILURE (49) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
TURN OFF IMAGER – CALL SERVICE power back on. If message reappears, call for
service.
PRINT JOB LIST FULL (86) Press Enter. Wait for a few films to print
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE before sending more images to print.
REGULATING TEMPERATURE Imager adjusting temperature. If not
completed in 45 minutes, call service.
REMOVE DISK SCSI A (B) BERNOULLI Press the Eject button on the disk drive.
DRIVE (93) Remove the disk from the drive.
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

REMOVE FILM FROM EXIT AREA (28) Insert the film saver and remove the film tray
INSERT FILM SAVER TO REMOVE FILM (see page 4-10). Raise the cover and remove
TRAY film from the exit area. If film is not accessible,
see page 4-13. Close cover, reinstall film tray,
and remove the film saver. Press Enter to
continue.
REMOVE FILM SAVER (31) Remove the film saver from the tray.
REMOVE FILM TRAY (40) Insert film saver and remove film tray (see
page 4-10).
REMOVE, LOAD, AND INSERT FILM Remove the film tray, load film, and reinstall
TRAY (12) the film tray.
REMOVE, LOAD, AND INSERT FILM Press Enter. Remove the film tray, load film,
TRAY (30) PRESS ENTER WHEN and reinstall the film tray.
READY TO REMOVE TRAY

REMOVE MISFEED FROM DEVELOPER Insert film saver and remove film tray (see
AREA (27) INSERT FILM SAVER TO page 4-10). Clear the developer jam (see
REMOVE FILM TRAY page 4-13). Close top cover, reinstall film
tray and remove film saver. Press Enter to
continue.

4-6 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Troubleshooting

Message Operator Action


REMOVE MISFEED FROM EXPOSURE Insert film saver and remove film tray (see
AREA (22) INSERT FILM SAVER TO page 4-10). Clear jammed film from exposure
REMOVE FILM TRAY area (see page 4-13). Close top cover,
reinstall film tray and remove film saver. Press
Enter to continue.
REMOVE MISFEED FROM FILM TRAY Insert film saver and remove film tray (see
(20) INSERT FILM SAVER TO REMOVE 4-10). Remove misfed film sheet (see page
FILM TRAY 4-11).
REPEATED ERROR DURING Press Enter to print all queued images. Call
EXPOSURE (50) PRESS ENTER TO for service if error persists.
PRINT ALL QUEUED IMAGES

SCSI BUS PROTOCOL ERROR INPUT A Press Enter. If message reappears, call for
(B) (92) PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE service.
TIMEOUT WAITING FOR FILM TRAY Press Enter. Then remove the film tray when
REMOVAL PRESS ENTER WHEN the release latch is activated.
READY TO REMOVE TRAY

UNABLE TO EJECT FILM TRAY (30) Manually depress the film carrier release
REMOVE FILM TRAY MANUALLY TO button on the imager and remove film tray.
CONTINUE

UNABLE TO FEED FILM (33) Message is displayed after third attempt to


PRESS ENTER TO TRY AGAIN feed film. Insert the film saver and remove the
film tray (see page 4-10). Gently shake the
film carrier. Remove any film stuck in film tray
cavity of imager and reinsert tray. Remove
film saver and press Enter to try again.
UNABLE TO READ CATALOG FILE ON Press Enter and retry operation.
A (B) (57) PRESS ENTER TO
CONTINUE

UNABLE TO READ DIR INFORMATION Press Enter and retry operation.


A (B) (52) PRESS ENTER TO
CONTINUE

UNABLE TO READ DISK INFORMATION Press Enter and retry operation.


A (B) (54) PRESS ENTER TO
CONTINUE

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 4-7


User Guide

Message Operator Action


UNABLE TO READ FAT INFORMATION Press Enter and retry operation.
A (B) (55) PRESS ENTER TO
CONTINUE

UNABLE TO READ IMAGE A (B) (56) Press Enter and retry operation.
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE
UNABLE TO READ PARTITION MAP ON Press Enter and retry operation.
A (B) (58) PRESS ENTER TO
CONTINUE

UNABLE TO UNLOCK FILM TRAY (34) Manually depress the film carrier release
REMOVE FILM TRAY MANUALLY TO button on the imager and remove film tray
CONTINUE manually.
UNASSIGNED ERROR CONDITION Call for service.
UNKNOWN SCSI DISK FORMAT INPUT Press Enter and retry operation.
A (B) (51) PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

VERY FEW STEPS IN TOE OF D LOG E Examine the quality of the calibration print.
CURVE VERIFY IMAGE QUALITY You may have to try new film.
VIDEO A (B) CALIBRATION FAILURE Press Enter and retry operation.
DEFAULT VALUES USED PRESS
ENTER TO CONTINUE

VIDEO A (B) CALIBRATION FAILURE Press Enter and retry operation.


PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

VIDEO A (B) CAL HIGH LIMIT WARNING Press Enter and retry operation.
USING HIGH LIMIT VALUE PRESS
ENTER.

VIDEO A (B) CAL LOW LIMIT WARNING Press Enter and retry operation.
USING LOW LIMIT VALUE PRESS
ENTER.

WAIT FOR SHEET TO EXIT BEFORE Wait for sheet to exit before removing tray
REMOVING TRAY FROM IMAGER from imager.
WARMING UP Wait until Ready displays.

4-8 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Troubleshooting

Clearing Film Misfeeds or Jams – General


The film jam misfeed/jam areas referred to in local display error messages are
shown in Figure 4-1.
• A is the film tray area, where film misfeeds can possibly occur.
• B and C identify the rollers on either side of the exposure area.
• D and E identify the developer and film exit areas.

C
D
Film Tray

B A

8300–183L

Figure 4-1. Possible Film Misfeed/Jam Locations

The following pages provide procedures for clearing film jams from all the areas
identified above. Before performing any of the procedures you must install the film
saver on the film tray, and remove the film tray from the machine.

!
Caution
Shutting off power to clear a film jam is not required. Shutting off the power
deletes all acquired unprinted images and may clear some error
messages. If you do this, you will have to resend the unprinted images to the
imager.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 4-9


User Guide

Inserting the Film Saver and Removing the Film Tray


1. Insert the film saver and remove the film tray as shown in Figure 4-2.
2. If the film tray does not pull out, use a pen or pencil to push the tray release
button located on the left side of the film tray. See Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-2. Inserting the Film Saver and Removing the Film Tray

Film Tray
Release Button 8300-135A

Figure 4-3. Releasing the Film Tray

4-10 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Troubleshooting

Clearing Misfeeds from the Film Tray Area


1. Check to see if a misfeed has occurred in the film tray, or film is partially
protruding from the tray.
2. Check inside the tray opening of the machine for misfed film.
3. If you cannot locate the misfeed, raise the top cover after pushing in the button
on the right side of the machine (see Figure 4-4). Then proceed to the next
paragraph.

Figure 4-4. Raising the Top Cover

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 4-11


User Guide

Clearing Jams from the Exposure Area


With the top cover opened, visually check for film jams in the interior of the machine.
1. Lift the wire guide for access to film in the bottom of the machine. See
Figure 4-5.
2. Place the wire guide in the upward position shown in Figure 4-5.
3. Remove any film jams.
4. Return the wire guide to its original position. Make sure it snaps into place.

1 2

3 4

Figure 4-5. Clearing Film Jams in the Exposure Area

4-12 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Troubleshooting

Clearing Jams from the Developer and Exit Areas

Safety Precautions
Take care working around the developer area. The developer drum is hot during
normal system operation. When the machine top cover is raised, power is
disconnected from the drum and it begins to cool down. However, some time must
elapse before the drum is cool.

!
Caution
Do not touch the developer drum.

8300-128A

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 4-13


User Guide

Clearing the Developer or Exit Jam


1. Open the top cover and unlatch the developer assembly cover (see Figure 4-6).
2. Open the developer assembly cover and allow time for the developer to cool.
3. Pull to remove any jammed film. (Caution: The film may still be hot.) You may
rotate the drum to aid in removing the film by turning the gear on the left side of
the drum.
4. Close and latch the cover.

1 2

8300-32A 8300-33A

3
4

8300-34A
8300-35A

Figure 4-6. Clearing Film Jams from the Developer and Exit Areas

4-14 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Troubleshooting

System Tests
Use the test menus to test operaton of the Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imager.

Note
While running system tests, you cannot acquire and print images.

You can run the following tests on the imager:


1. Perform System Diagnostic Test – Runs diagnostic software to test imager
functions the same way the power-on self-test does.
2. Print SMPTE Pattern – Prints four stored test pattern images on one film.
3. Perform Keypad Test – Tests keypad and individual key function.
4. Display Software Versions – Displays versions for software programs that run
the imager.
5. Display System Configuration – Displays current system configuration values
such as image memory, contrast and density parameters for each input (user).

Test Menus

System Diagnostic
Test
See page 4-17

Print SMPTE
Pattern 4:1
See page 4-17

Keypad Test
See page 4-18

Display Software
Versions
See page 4-19

Display System
Configuration
See page 4-20

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 4-15


User Guide

Menu Buttons
Use the following buttons to access, start, and exit test menus:
1. Test Button – Accesses test menus.
2. Down Arrow Button – Scrolls to the next test. From the last test, scrolls to the
first test.
3. Up Arrow Button – Scrolls to the previous test. From the first test, scrolls to the
last test.
4. Enter Button – After you access a test menu, allows required conditions to be
set or starts a test.
5. Exit Button – Cancels a test or a parameter change.

1 2 3 5 4

Figure 4-7. Menu Buttons

4-16 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Troubleshooting

Running Tests

Perform System Diagnostic Test


To run a System Diagnostic Test:

1. Access the System Diagnostic Test menu by pressing Test


.

2. Start the system diagnostic test by pressing Enter .

• Follow instructions on the local panel to set up conditions for the test.
• If the test completes successfully, the System Diagnostic Test menu is
displayed.
• If a fault occurs, an error message is displayed.

3. To cancel the test, press Exit


. The system displays a “TEST CANCELLED BY
OPERATOR” message.

4. To return to the first System Diagnostic Test menu, press Exit


.

Print SMPTE Pattern


To run a Print SMPTE Pattern test:

1. From the System Diagnostic Test menu, press to access the Print SMPTE
Pattern display.

2. To print the SMPTE pattern menu, press Enter .

• Follow instructions on the local panel to set up conditions for the test.
• If the print completes successfully, the Print SMPTE Pattern menu is
displayed.
• If a fault occurs, an error message is displayed.

3. To cancel the print, press Exit


. The system displays a “TEST CANCELLED BY
OPERATOR” message.

4. To return to the first Print SMPTE Pattern menu, press Exit


.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 4-17


User Guide

Keypad Test
Before you can run a keypad test, a remote keypad must be attached to the imager.
To run a Keypad Test for one of the input modules:

1. From the Print SMPTE Pattern display, press to access the Keypad Test
menu.

2. To start the Keypad Test, press Enter .

During the first part of the keypad test, the menu shows test progress.
3. When the first part of the test is complete, the menu prompts you to press any
key. To test individual key function, press each key in turn.
Each time you press a key, the menu should identify the pressed key.

Example: If you press Select


, the menu should show that you pressed it.

4. To cancel the test, press Exit


. The system displays a “TEST CANCELLED BY
OPERATOR” message.

5. To return to the first Keypad Test menu, press Exit


.

6. To perform the keypad test on the other input module, press and repeat
steps 2 through 5.

4-18 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Troubleshooting

Display Software Versions


The imager contains the following types of software.
• Imager Firmware
• VRTX32
• Contrast Tables
• Convolution Kernel
If you need to check the version of one of these software programs, access the
software versions as follows:

1. From the Keypad Test display, press to access the Display Software
Versions menu. Use this menu to access the software versions.

2. To see the current Imager Firmware version, press Enter :

IMAGER FIRMWARE 4.6

3. To access the VRTX32 version, press :

VRTX32 1.0.8

4. To access the Contrast Tables version, press :

CONTRAST TABLES 1.0

5. To access the Convolution Kernel version, press :

CONVOLUTION KERNEL 1.0.5

6. To access the Network Firmware (if installed), press :

NETWORK FIRMWARE 3.3

7. To return to the Display Software Versions menu, press Exit


.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 4-19


User Guide

Display System Configuration


This parameter allows the system configuration values to be displayed. The
configuration values appear in the order listed as shown:

1. DRAM
See page 4-21

2. Contrast
See page 4-21

3. Density
See page 4-21

4. Convolution
See page 4-21

5. Copies
See page 4-21

6. User’s ID
See page 4-21

7. Protocol
See page 4-21

8. Modality
See page 4-21

To display system configuration values:


1. To access the Display System Configuration menu, from the Display Software
Versions menu, press .

2. Press Enter to access each of the menus listed in Table 4-2.

4-20 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Troubleshooting

Configuration Menu Table


Table 4-2. Configuration Menus

Configuration Menu Description


DRAM (Image Memory) Displays current DRAM configuration. The DRAM
display shows how the image memory is configured
between the two input modules.
Example:
A: 4.00 B: 3.75
CONTRAST Shows the contrast table selected for each input.
Example:
A: 12 B: 7
DENSITY Shows the density setting selected for each input.
Example:
A: 5 B: 9
CONVOLUTION Shows the convolution setting for each input.
(Sharp/Smooth) Example:
A: AUTO B: 4
COPIES Shows the copies to print setting for each input.
Example:
A: 1 B: 1
USER’S ID Shows the user’s ID setting for each input.
Example:
A: NETWORK B: ANALOG
PROTOCOL Shows the control protocol setting for each input.
Example:
A: DICOM B: KEYPAD
MODALITY Shows the input module installed for each input.
Example:
A: ENET B: ANALOG

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 4-21


User Guide

Calling for Support


Once you have tried the recommended troubleshooting procedures on the preceding
pages, but are unable to repair the machine, it is time to call for help.
Before you call for Service, have the following information ready:
Model Number: 8300
Serial Number: (For serial number location, see page iv.)
Phone for Service (U.S.): 1-800-328-2910 or 1–972–805–1500

4-22 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Specifications

Specifications

Dimensions
Height: 46 cm (18 in.)
Width: 46 cm (18 in.)
Depth: 66 cm (26 in.)
Weight: 56 Kg (124 lb)

Electrical
Phase: Single
Voltage: U.S.: 100 - 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Outside U.S.: 100 - 240 VAC, 50 - 60 Hz
Power: 700 Watts, maximum

Operating Environment
Temperature: 15° to 32° C (59° to 90° F)
Relative Humidity: 15% to 75% RH, Non-condensing
Magnetic Field: 100 Gauss, maximum

Non-Operating Environment: Shipping and Storage


Temperature: -30° to 60° C (-22° to 140° F)
Relative Humidity: 15% RH to 85% RH, Non–condensing
Barometric Pressure: 14.76 in. Hg - 31.3 in. Hg
500 hPa to 1060 hPa

Interface Modules
• Digital
• SCSI
• Network

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 5-1


User Guide

Control Interfaces
Control Panel
Remote Keypad
Host

Output
First Print (After Ready indicator lights): 110 Seconds
Subsequent Prints: 55 Prints/hr

Film Characteristics
Size: 8-inch by 10-inch
Cartridge Capacity: 100 Sheets

Options
Second Input Module
Internal Magneto/Optical Drive

Agency Compliance
See the Safety, EMC, and CE Marking Compliance section at the beginning of
this User Guide.

Restrictions
The Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imager (8300 Laser Imager) cannot be used in
the presence of flammable anesthetic gas mixtures.
Only factory trained personnel are authorized to install and service the 8300
Laser Imager.
Circuit drawings are made available to the service engineer.
If a Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System is used with the 8300 Laser
Imager, the Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System must be installed no
closer than 1.8 meters from a patient bed or chair.

5-2 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Technical Information

Technical Information

Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imaging Film


Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imaging Film (Laser Imaging Film) is a high-resolution,
infrared-sensitive, photothermographic film designed specifically for the new family
of Kodak DryView Laser Imaging Systems.
This new film delivers the same diagnostic image quality you get with your current
silver halide laser films – but it requires no “wet” chemistry, no “wet” film processors,
and no darkroom procedures. Which means there is no need for special plumbing,
wet chemistry disposal procedures, or modifications to your facility. This new film is
packaged in daylight load cartridges/packages and is available in 14 by 17 inch, 11
by 14 inch, and 8 by 10 inch sizes. All sizes are available in blue or clear, 7 mil
polyester base.

Spectral Sensitivity
Laser Imaging Film is infrared sensitive and has been sensitized to the infrared laser
diode of Kodak DryView Laser Imaging Systems. When handled according to
instructions on the film package, safelights are not needed. It is not recommended,
but if you remove undeveloped film from the daylight load package, you will need a
darkroom setting and a green safe light, such as an IR Safelight.
Sensitometric Characteristics
3.5

2.5
DENSITY

1.5

0.5

0
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
RELATIVE LOG EXPOSURE

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 6-1


User Guide

Image Quality
Laser Imaging Film delivers diagnostic-quality, continuous-tone images along with
sharp alphanumerics and optimum contrast. This high-quality silver-based film
provides radiologists with diagnostic information similar to that they are accustomed
to viewing – including the spatial resolution, contrast, and gray levels. Plus, because
it is a totally dry imaging process, there is no image quality variability due to “wet”
chemistry.

Automatic Image Quality Control


Laser Imaging Film is system-matched for Kodak’s unique Automatic Image Quality
Control technology. This fully automated system, which is a standard feature of
Kodak DryView Laser Imaging Systems, is designed to ensure that contrast,
density, and other image quality parameters meet preset user preferences,
package-to-package, lot-to-lot.

Less Impact on the Environment


Disposal regulations and procedures for “wet” processing chemistry are
time-consuming and expensive. And even with the most exacting procedures, the
potential to discharge hazardous materials into the environment exists.
Tests show that Laser Imaging Film is not considered hazardous to the environment.
As a result, you can develop, recycle, and dispose of films with less impact on the
environment than if you were using wet developed silver halide films.

6-2 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Technical Information

Kodak DryView Laser Imaging Film


Environmental Regulations Comparison
Wet Silver Halide DryView

Developer Fixer Wash Film Film


Product
Regulation
OSHA MSDS Yes Yes No No No
DOT Hazard Yes Yes No No No
Use Permits Local* Local* Local* No No
Disposal
Regulation**
EPA Hazard Yes Yes Yes No No
DOT Hazard Yes Yes No No No
Local Sewer Yes Yes Yes NA NA
Authority

Note: There is no SUPERFUND liability with Laser Imaging Film.

* “Local” = Regulated in many/most localities.


** State and local laws vary. Consult appropriate regulations or authorities prior to disposal.

Storage and Handling of Undeveloped Film


As with other laser imaging films, to achieve consistent results 77°F 25°C
up to the expiration date indicated on the film package, Laser 41°F 5°C
Imaging Film must be stored in a cool, dry place (41°F/5°C to
77°F/25°C) and protected from radiation and chemistry fumes.
TEMP
The film can also withstand short-term temperature spikes (up to 95°F/35°C for
several hours) during transit without any significant effect on film quality or
performance. Transit temperatures above 95°F/35°C will gradually diminish shelf life.
If the Kodak Automatic Image Quality Control (AIQC) system encounters film that
has been damaged by improper handling, it will automatically alert system operators
before the film is developed.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 6-3


User Guide

Handling of Developed Film


Like other photographic films or data storage materials, the handling of Kodak
DryView Laser Imaging Film requires reasonable care. Spills, humidity, and other
moisture typically have no significant effect on developed films. Prolonged exposure
to intense light or excessive heat (130°F/54.4°C for more than three hours) may
cause some gradual darkening of images. Leaving films in vehicles in hot climates
for extended periods of time is not recommended.
Under typical working conditions, Laser Imaging Film will maintain diagnostic quality
for over 100 years. For best results, store film in sleeves when not being reviewed.
Laser Imaging Film can be left on a light box for more than 24 hours; in extreme
cases in which light boxes are exceptionally hot (120°F/49°C), we recommend
removing them prior to eight hours of continuous exposure.
Care should be taken when using spotlight viewing for more than 30 seconds,
because temperatures near the light source may exceed 180°F/82.2°C. “Cool” hot
lights should be used. Use in slide projectors is not recommended due to the high
temperatures generally found in these devices.
With the new Kodak DryView technology, a small amount of final development
occurs when the film exits the Laser Imager and is initially exposed to ambient or
view box lighting. This is virtually undetectable and has no effect on image quality
(i.e., less than 0.02 change in density). This small density increase is uniform and
permanent upon full exposure of the film under normal handling conditions (i.e.,
room light or view box).

Archivability of Developed Film


Laser Imaging Film is fully archivable for more than 100 years when stored at
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) recommended storage conditions
(77°F/25°C). Developed films may be stored at higher temperatures, but that may
affect archivability. For example, storing films at a constant elevated temperature of
90°F/32.2°C may reduce archivability to 15 years.

Exposure to Moisture
While moisture can damage traditional wet processed silver halide films, Kodak
DryView Laser Imaging Films typically withstand humidity, spills, and other forms of
water without any significant effect on image quality or film integrity. If needed, films
can be cleaned with a clean, damp cloth.

6-4 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Technical Information

Odor Dissipation
The “wet” chemistry associated with the development of silver halide film creates
strong, unpleasant odors. By eliminating “wet” chemistry, Kodak DryView
technology eliminates virtually all of these odors. While some low-level odors are
produced during the development process, they pose no known adverse health
risks. Processing odor levels are further reduced by a non-hazardous, recyclable
filter in Kodak DryView Laser Imaging Systems. This filter traps most low-level
odors and prevents them from dissipating into the work environment. To help
maintain optimum performance, the filter requires periodic replacement. Unlike silver
halide systems, Kodak DryView Laser Imagers require no special venting.

Heat Dissipation
Kodak DryView Laser Imaging Systems use a controlled amount of heat to develop
Laser Imaging Films. The heat has virtually no effect on the air temperature of the
work area. The amount of heat dissipated into an area during a day is typically less
than the heat generated by four 100-watt light bulbs.

Film Recycling
According to Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) standards, Kodak DryView
Laser Imaging Film is not considered hazardous – it requires no special disposal
procedures. But it does contain silver and polyester that may be recovered by using
one of several recycling processes.
If you are interested in recycling and silver recovery, Kodak can provide your local
recyclers with the information they need to get started. In some countries, Kodak has
established national contracts with recycling firms. Call your local Kodak sales
representative for more information about these contracts.

Kodak and DryView are trademarks of Eastman Kodak Company.


Aegis is a trademark of Acuson.
Sony is a trademark of Sony Electronics, Inc.

2002 March Rev. E 1340744 6-5


User Guide

BLANK PAGE

6-6 1340744 2002 March Rev. E


Kodak DryView 8300 Laser Imager – Operator Training
The Field Engineer will cover the following information with the operator upon completion of
the hardware installation. (All references are to the User Guide.)
Product Overview (Section 1)
- Identify the system capabilities:
a. Time for first print and subsequent prints. (1-1)
b. Acquire from host, keypad, network or M/O disk. (1-1, 2-9))
- Identify special features:
a. No chemicals and no special venting required.
b. Two inputs can operate independently.
c. Automatic Image Quality Control. (1-3)
Controls and Indicators (Section 2)
- Local Panel:
a. Identify the controls. (2-2)
- Remote Keypad:
a. Explain that this is an optional component.
b. Identify the indicators. (2-3, 2-4)
c. Identify the controls. (2-4)
- General Setup Menus:
a. Identify correct setup menu(s).
b. Identify menu buttons. (2-14)
c. Identify menu format. (2-15)
d. Demonstrate menu change procedure: (2-16)
1. Demonstrate and then have operator change density.
2. Demonstrate how a contrast test is performed.
3. Demonstrate and then have operator change contrast.
e. Describe parameter menu table. (2-17)
Sequence of Operation (Section 3)
- Demonstrate the following:
a. How to power on the system. (3-1)
b. Produce a print using the (optional) keypad. (3-2)
c. Loading the film tray. (3-11)

1
Maintenance and Troubleshooting Procedures (Section 4)
- Demonstrate:
a. How to interpret error (display) codes. (4-1)
b. Where to look for possible jammed film. (4-9)
c. How to insert the film saver and remove the film tray. (4-10)
d. How to open the top cover to clear jams. (4-11)
e. How to perform system tests. (4-15)
- Placing a service call: (4-22)
a. Model and serial number identification.
b. Working with the Customer Care Center – They will try to assist you over the phone.
Technical Information (Section 6)
- Describe Automatic Image Quality Control. (6-2)
- Storage of film: (6-3)
a. Describe storage of undeveloped film:
1. 41°F/5°C to 77°F/25°C.
2. Protected from radiation and chemistry fumes (wet processor).
b. Describe storage of developed film:
1. Spills, humidity, and moisture – no significant effect.
2. Leaving films in vehicles in hot climates for extended periods of time not
recommended.
3. Store film in sleeves when not being reviewed.
4. Light box viewing:
a. If light box is exceptionally hot, remove film prior to 8 hours.
5. Small density increase:
a. Uniform across film.
b. Permanent upon full exposure of the film under normal handling conditions.
- Archivability of developed film (6-4) – 100 years when stored at recommended storage
conditions.
- Film Recycling: (6-5)
a. Not hazardous according to EPA standards.
b. No special disposal procedures.
c. Silver and polyester may be recovered.
I feel that the Field Engineer has covered all relevant information relating to the Kodak
DryView 8300 Laser Imager.

DATE

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE

FIELD ENGINEER SIGNATURE

2
Kodak and DryView are trademarks of Eastman Kodak Company.

Printed in U.S.A. 1340744_E_mar02

EASTMAN KODAK COMPANY


Rochester, NY 14650 HEALTH IMAGING
7 X 9 inside cover

Kodak DryView 8600 Laser Imaging System /


for Mammography

User Guide

8186546
74-0401-6533-9
3/00 Rev. B
Classification, Warnings, and Cautions

Classification, Warnings, and Cautions


for DryView 8600 Laser Imager
Read and understand all instructions before using.
Classifications
UL Classified

File Number E163816


Control Number 48VF
Medical Equipment
UL 2601-1 CAN/CSA No. 601.1
!
Classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. With Respect to Electric Shock,
Fire, Casualty and Medical Hazards only in Accordance with UL 2601-1, CAN/CSA
C22.2 No. 601.1 and IEC 601.1.
! WARNING
This equipment is operated with hazardous voltage which can shock,
burn, or cause death.
Remove wall plug before servicing equipment. Never pull on cord to remove from
outlet. Grasp plug and pull to disconnect.
Do not operate equipment with a damaged power cord.
Do not use an extension cord to power this equipment.
Use only the power cord supplied with the equipment.
Position the power cord so it will not be tripped over or pulled.
Connect this equipment to a grounded outlet.

! WARNING
Not protected against ingress of liquids, including bodily fluids.

! WARNING
For continued protection against fire, replace fuses only with fuses of the same type
and rating.

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 i


DryView 8600 User Guide

Classification, Warnings, and Cautions


for DryView 8600 Laser Imager (continued)

Avoid touching the developer drum when removing film jams from the imager. The
developer drum may become hot during extended imager operation.

! CAUTION
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. Those limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

! CAUTION
Do not use in the presence of flammable anesthetics, oxygen or nitrous oxide. This
equipment does not have a gas sealed electronics enclosure and could ignite any
flammable or explosive gases present in its environment.

ii 8186546 2000 March Rev. B


Classification, Warnings, and Cautions

Classification, Warnings, and Cautions


for DryView 8600 Laser Imager (continued)

! CAUTION
U.S. Federal law restricts sale of this device to or on the order of a licensed health
care practitioner.

! CAUTION
This equipment is intended to connect to other medical devices. Installation and
service maintenance are to be performed only by qualified service personnel. The
Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System must be installed no closer than 1.8
meters from a patient bed or chair.

! CAUTION

Avoid Laser Beam

This equipment employs an invisible 25 milliwatt laser beam. Laser


radiation may be present when the machine operates without panels or
covers installed.
Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein, may result in eye damage.
Covers shall be removed by authorized service personnel only.
There are no “user” serviceable parts in this machine.

! CAUTION
General External Cleaning: This equipment may be cleaned with a damp cloth
using water with mild detergent, or commercial electronic equipment cleaner.

! CAUTION
Do not substitute or modify any part of this equipment without approval of Eastman
Kodak Company.

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 iii


DryView 8600 User Guide

Classification, Warnings, and Cautions


for DryView 8600 Laser Imager (continued)

Type B Applied Part

iv 8186546 2000 March Rev. B


Safety, EMC, and CE Marking Compliance

Safety, EMC, and CE Marking Compliance

Agency Approvals
This equipment has been tested for and complies with the following Safety and
Emission Standards. Certificates of Compliance and Declarations of Conformity
have been issued for the following areas:

Australia/New Zealand:
AS/NZS 3548:1992
AS 2211-1991
AS3200.1-1990/NZS 6150:1990

Canada:
C108.8-M1983 Class B (Conducted and Emitted EMI/RFI Specs)
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 601.1

Europe:
EN50082-1 (EMC)
EN55011 Group 1 Class B (Medical Device Safety)
EN60601-1 (Safety Medical Equipment)
EN60825:1991 (Laser Safety)
EN61000-3-2: Harmonics
IEC61000-3-3:1995 Voltage Fluctuations/Flicker
IEC61000-4-2:1995 ESD
IEC61000-4-3:1996 Radiated Radio Frequency
IEC61000-4-4:1995 Fast Transient/Burst
IEC61000-4-5:1995 Surge
IEC61000-4-6: Conducted Radio Frequency
IEC61000-4-8: Power Frequency Magnetic Fields
IEC61000-4-11: Dips and Interrupts

1999 June Rev. A 8186546 v


DryView 8600 User Guide

Japan:
CISPR Group 1 Class B

USA:
47CFR15B Class B (Conducted and Emitted EMI/RFI Specs)
FDA: 21CFR CH-1. SCH-J. Part 1040 (Performance Standards for Light
Emitting Products)
UL 2601-1 (Medical and Dental Equipment)
IEC 601-1 (Medical Device Safety)
IEC 601-1-1 (EMC for Medical Devices)
IEC 825-1 (Laser Safety)

ROW:
CISPR 11 Group 1 Class B (Conducted and Emitted EMI/RFI Specs)
IEC 1000-4-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, and 11

CE Marking:
This equipment is part of a medical system and conforms to the medical safety and
EMC in EN60601-1-1, EN60601-1-2, and the 93/42/EEC, MDD (Medical Device
Directive).
A Technical File and Declaration of Conformity with the Essential Requirements of
the Medical Device Directive have been prepared and signed by the appropriate
personnel and are located at:
Kodak AG
Quality Services and Product Safety
70323 Stuttgart Germany
Telephone 49-0711-40-06-5291

vi 8186546 1999 June Rev. A


Safety, EMC, and CE Marking Compliance

FCC:
This device complies with the limits for a Class B digital device listed in Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.

Industry Canada:
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement
sur le matérial brouilleur du Canada.

EU:
This equipment complies with the January 1996 EU Community EMC Requirements,
per EN55011 Class B.

1999 June Rev. A 8186546 vii


DryView 8600 User Guide

BLANK PAGE

viii 8186546 1999 June Rev. A


Table of Contents

PLEASE NOTE The information contained herein is based on the experience


and knowledge relating to the subject matter gained by Eastman
Kodak Company prior to publication.
No patent license is granted by this information.
Eastman Kodak Company reserves the right to change this
information without notice and makes no warranty, express or
implied, with respect to this information. Kodak shall not be liable
for any loss or damage, including consequential or special
damages, resulting from the use of this information, even if loss
or damage is caused by Kodak’s negligence or other fault.

Table of Contents
Description Page
Classification, Warnings, and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Safety, EMC, and CE Marking Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Section 1 – Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
The Kodak DryView 8600 Laser Imaging System / for
Mammography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
How the DryView 8600 Laser Imager Works . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Automatic Image Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Systems Connecting to the DryView 8600 Laser Imager 1-3
Service and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
IMPORTANT NOTICE TO PURCHASER . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Section 2 – Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
DryView 8600 Laser Imager Controls – Main . . . . . . . . 2-1
Local Panel Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
(Optional) Remote Keypad Controls and Indicators . . . 2-3
System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
General Setup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Menu Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Menu Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Menu Change Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Parameter Menu Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

1999 June Rev. A 8186546 ix


DryView 8600 User Guide

Description Page
Section 3 – Operation .............................. 3-1
System Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Producing a Print from a Host Modality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Producing a Print Using the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Requesting Contrast Samples and Changing
the Contrast Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Digital Modality with Host Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Digital Modality with Remote Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Loading/Unloading the Film Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Section 4 – Quality Control Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Running a QC Baseline Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Running a Daily QC Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Section 5 – Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Local Panel and Remote Keypad Message Types . . . . 5-1
Local Panel Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Clearing Film Jams – General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Inserting the Film Saver and Removing the Film Tray . 5-8
Clearing Jams from the Film Tray Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Clearing Jams from the Exposure Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Clearing Jams from the Developer and Exit Areas . . . . 5-11
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Clearing the Developer or Exit Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
System Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Test Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Menu Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Print QC Step Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Print SMPTE Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Keypad Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Display Software Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Display System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Configuration Menu Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Calling for Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

x 8186546 1999 June Rev. A


Table of Contents

Description Page
Section 6 – Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Non-Operating Environment: Shipping and Storage . . . 6-1
Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Control Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Film Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Agency Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Section 7 – Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Spectral Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Image Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Automatic Image Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Less Impact on the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Storage and Handling of Undeveloped Film . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Handling of Developed Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Archivability of Developed Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Exposure to Moisture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Odor Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Heat Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Film Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Operator Training Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1999 June Rev. A 8186546 xi


DryView 8600 User Guide

BLANK PAGE

xii 8186546 1999 June Rev. A


Section 1 – Introduction

Introduction

The Kodak DryView 8600 Laser Imaging System / for Mammography


The Kodak DryView 8600 Laser Imager / for Mammography is a continuous tone
laser imager with an integrated photothermographic film developer. The imager
produces high-quality monochrome images, using an optical laser scanning system,
a data control system that manages external data flow, and a film developer.
The imager uses 8 by 10-inch (20.3 by 25.4 cm) Kodak DryView Mammography
Laser Imaging Film. Each film package contains 100 sheets of film.
The imager produces the first print in approximately 185 seconds, and subsequent
prints at approximately 25 prints per hour. It can produce output from more than one
modality.
The imager acquires, formats and prints images under control of a host modality.
The operator uses a local panel on the imager for control of various local functions.
No machine maintenance is required of the operator.

Figure 1-1. Kodak DryView 8600 Laser Imager / for Mammography

1999 June Rev. A 8186546 1-1


DryView 8600 User Guide

How the DryView 8600 Laser Imager Works


Each time it receives a print command, the imager prints an image using the
following sequence.

Note
The circled numbers in Figure 1-2 match the sequence steps. Dashed lines
show the film path.

1. Feed film – The feed area drives a sheet of film from the supply tray and feeds it
into the separation rollers.
2. Separate film – The separation rollers check for more than one sheet, then drive
a single sheet of film into the exposure module.
3. Expose film – A laser beam exposes the film. The film is then guided into the
film developer.
4. Develop film – The film develops as it passes over the heated developer drum.
5. Check image quality – The film is routed from the film developer, through the
densitometer, and out to the receive tray.

Figure 1-2. Print Sequence

1-2 8186546 1999 June Rev. A


Section 1 – Introduction

Automatic Image Quality Control


The built-in densitometer is a key element in the Automatic Image Quality Control
(AIQC) process. It enables the imager to automatically adjust image processing
parameters to produce the best image. The imager adjusts these parameters each
time it prints a calibration film. A calibration film is printed when:
 The DryView 8600 Laser Imager is powered on.
 The film tray is inserted in the imager.
 A calibration film is requested from the setup menu.
 The imager has not been used for 8 hours, and any type of print is
requested.
 The imager reactivates from Energy Saver mode.

Note
If the Energy Saver mode is activated, the DryView 8600 Laser Imager shuts
down its heaters and motors after 3 hours of inactivity. Any button pressed
reactivates the imager to automatically warm up to operating temperature.
Also, the imager reactivates if it is sent an image. A calibration film prints once
the imager reaches operating temperature.

Systems Connecting to the DryView 8600 Laser Imager


The DryView 8600 Laser Imager is used in full-field digital mammography (and in
other digital mammography applications) to reproduce digitized radiograph images
received from a digital radiography modality.

! Warning
J1 (input/output) is intended for interconnection to equipment that complies
with the appropriate IEC 601-1/IEC 601-1-1 harmonized national standards
when interconnected.

Service and Installation


U.S. Connection: 120 volts Line to Neutral
Only factory-trained personnel are authorized to install and service the DryView
8600 Laser Imager. Circuit drawings are made available to the service technician.

1999 June Rev. A 8186546 1-3


DryView 8600 User Guide

IMPORTANT NOTICE TO PURCHASER


Kodak warrants that the Kodak DryView 8600 Laser Imager will be free from defects
in parts, material and manufacture for the period of one (1) year from the date of
installation. For defects occurring during the warranty period and about which Kodak
has received notice during the warranty period, Kodak will provide Buyer with free
replacement parts and labor to replace warranty-covered items.
THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER PRODUCT WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS, AND THOSE ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING OR
USAGE OF TRADE.
The express warranty does not apply to the following: expendable parts; defects or
damage incurred in transportation to the end-user; defects or damage due to
neglect, misuse, operator error, improper installation or alteration of the DryView
8600 Laser Imager; or operation of the DryView 8600 Laser Imager out of
specification.
EXCEPT FOR THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY STATED ABOVE, KODAK IS NOT
LIABLE FOR DIRECT DAMAGES. KODAK WILL NOT IN ANY EVENT BE LIABLE
FOR INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, REGARDLESS
OF THE LEGAL THEORY ASSERTED, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE AND STRICT
LIABILITY.

1-4 8186546 1999 June Rev. A


Section 2 – Controls and Indicators

Controls and Indicators

DryView 8600 Laser Imager Controls – Main


The imager uses the following controls. The numbered descriptions below
correspond to the numbered callouts in Figure 2-1.
1. Local Panel – Uses a two-line display with 40 characters per line to provide
status, setup, and test information. The panel contains six function buttons and a
numeric keypad. (See page 2-2 for details.)
2. Power Switch – Controls power to the imager.
3. Film Saver – Protects film from exposure when the film tray is temporarily
removed from the DryView 8600.
4. Remote Keypad –Displays control settings for the imager and allows you to
adjust these settings. (See page 2-3 for details.) This keypad is an option and
will not be used in all applications.
5. Manual Film Tray Release button – Allows the film tray to be removed without
the DryView 8600 Imager being powered on. Insert the film saver before using
this button or the film will be exposed.

Figure 2-1. DryView 8600 Laser Imager – Controls and Indicators

1999 June Rev. A 8186546 2-1


DryView 8600 User Guide

Local Panel Controls and Indicators


The numbered descriptions below correspond to the numbered callouts in
Figure 2-2.
1. Display – Uses a two-line, alphanumeric display to provide status, setup, and
test information on the DryView 8600 Imager.
2. A and B Setup (buttons) – Select one of the two input modules for parameter
setup or changes. (B Setup is not currently used.)
3. Test (button) – Accesses the test menu.
4. Down and Up Arrows (buttons) – Scroll the display and move the display
cursor, when present.
5. Exit (button) – Allows user to exit any menu or local panel operation.
6. Enter (button) – Accepts entry. Executes commands or advances menu.
7. Numeric Keypad (buttons) – Allows user to enter numeric information.
8. Clear (button) – Clears (deletes) entries.

Figure 2-2. Local Panel

2-2 8186546 1999 June Rev. A


Section 2 – Controls and Indicators

(Optional) Remote Keypad Controls and Indicators


The numbered descriptions below correspond to the numbered callouts in Figure
2-3.
1. Imager Ready (indicator) – When illuminated, indicates that the imager is
operational.
2. Check Imager (indicator) – Flashes to indicate a fault or out of film condition.
An associated error message is displayed on the local panel.
3. Memory Full (indicator) – When illuminated, indicates that there is insufficient
memory available to acquire another image. This condition is reported only to the
user whose image memory area is full. The condition should automatically
correct itself as the imager prints films and frees memory space.

1
4

5
10

8
7

Figure 2-3. Remote Keypad (Optional)

1999 June Rev. A 8186546 2-3


DryView 8600 User Guide

4. Format Selected (indicator) – Displays the number of images (1, 2, 4, or 6) to


be printed on one sheet of film.
5. Select (button) – Selects the number of images to be printed on one sheet of
film. Sequences the Format Selected indicator through 1, 2, 4, and 6.
6. Print (button) – Prints the selected image(s). Pressing this button while the
PRESS PRINT for ADDITIONAL copy indicator is illuminated prints another
copy of the selected image(s).
7. Acquire (button) – Acquires images.
8. Press PRINT for ADDITIONAL copy (indicator) – When illuminated, tells you
that a print is developing and indicates that you can create an additional print if
you press the Print button while the indicator is illuminated.
9. Images Acquired (indicator) – Indicates the number of images acquired to be
printed on one sheet of film. The indicator only displays a number less than or
equal to the number displayed by the Format Selected indicator.

Note
If the imager is in the Autoprint mode, the print cycle begins automatically when
the number in the Images Acquired indicator equals the number in the Format
Selected indicator. When the number in the Images Acquired indicator is less
than the Format Selected indicator, you can press the Print button to start
printing.

10. Erase (button) – Deletes images in the reverse order from that in which they
were acquired. The last image acquired is the first deleted. As images are
deleted, the Images Acquired indicator decrements.

System Setup
The DryView 8600 Laser Imager provides setup menus that configure and adjust
the default settings (parameters) that control functions such as printing or image
density. Default settings are the values that are loaded when you switch on the
imager. (When your imager is installed, it is set up to work for your environment, so
you should rarely need to access and change the default function settings. They
should be changed only after consultation with the lead interpreting physician and a
Kodak representative.)

2-4 8186546 1999 June Rev. A


Section 2 – Controls and Indicators

If the DryView 8600 Laser Imager is being used in a DICOM network, the Density,
Contrast, Print Contrast Samples, Sharp/Smooth, Gamma Table, Image Size, and
Detector Size parameters can be changed only at the modality or in the PACS Link
9410 Acquisition System. Changes in the PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System are to
be performed only by a Kodak service representative.
The general setup menus are accessed in the order shown below. Individual menu
descriptions are listed alphabetically in Table 2-1.

General Setup Menus

1. Density *
See page 2-10 9. Keypad Format **
See page 2-11
2. Contrast *
See page 2-10 10. Audible Alerts **
Print Contrast See page 2-9
3.
Samples *
See page 2-13 11. Exposure Index
See page 2-10
4. Sharp/Smooth *
Perform
See page 2-13 12.
Calibration
See page 2-12
5. Polarity
See page 2-12 13. Date/Time

Number of See page 2-10


6.
Copies **
See page 2-12 14. Gamma Table *
See page 2-11
7. Autoprint **
See page 2-9 15. Image Size *
1. Format
See page 2-11
See page 2-11 8. Film Layout **
See page 2-10 16. Detector Size *
2. Mode
See page 2-10
See page 2-12

* If the system is in a DICOM network, this parameter can be changed only at the
modality or in the PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System.

** Applicable to the optional Remote Keypad only.

1999 June Rev. A 8186546 2-5


DryView 8600 User Guide

Menu Buttons
Use the following buttons to access and change parameter menus (see Figure 2-4):
1. A Setup (button) or B Setup (button) – Selects an input menu for setup. (B
Setup is not used in DICOM network installations.)
2. Down Arrow (button) – Scrolls to the next parameter menu. From the last
menu, scrolls to the first menu.
3. Up Arrow (button) – Scrolls to the previous parameter menu. From the first
menu, scrolls to the last menu.
4. Enter (button) – After you access a parameter menu, opens an editable display.
When you enter a new value for a parameter, pressing the Enter button enters
the new value for the parameter.
5. Exit (button) – Cancels changes entered in an editable display and restores the
original values or settings. Continued pressing allows quick exit of setup function.
6. Clear (button) – Clears an incorrect entry. If you enter values that are out of
range for a display, an audible signal sounds. To delete the incorrect value, press
the Clear button.

Figure 2-4. Menu Buttons

2-6 8186546 1999 June Rev. A


Section 2 – Controls and Indicators

Menu Format
Parameter menus display information about the menu and the parameter.
The first menu for each parameter:
 Tells you the menu number
 Identifies the parameter
 Lists the current value for the parameter
 Identifies the current input module selected
 Provides information about changing the parameter and continuing to the next
menu.
Subsequent menus tell you:
 What to enter
 The range of possible values for the parameter.
A sample parameter menu is shown in Figure 2-5, followed by the general procedure
used to change a parameter.

Information Menu Current Input


Parameter
Line Number Value Module

Action Line

Figure 2-5. Parameter Menu Display

1999 June Rev. A 8186546 2-7


DryView 8600 User Guide

Menu Change Procedure


To change an individual parameter:
1. Select an input module by pressing either the A Setup or B Setup button.
(B Setup is not currently used.)
2. Access the parameter menu by using the Down or Up Arrow buttons to scroll
through the list.

Note
The location of each parameter menu is shown earlier in this section.

3. When the correct parameter is displayed, press Enter to access the parameter’s
change menus.
You may find that you need to change information in a series of menus.
Each menu display contains an Information line (upper line) and an Action line
(lower line) instruction. (The Action line tells you how to change the parameter
and how to continue.)
4. Use the arrow buttons or the numeric keypad to change the value and then
continue to the next menu as instructed.

Note
If you enter a value that is out of range, the imager beeps. Clear the entry by
pressing the Clear button (see step 5) and re-entering the appropriate value.

5. When you have made changes to a menu, press one of the following buttons to
exit the menu:
 To accept the changes and exit to the previous menu, press Enter.
 To cancel the changes and exit to the previous menu with the original values
displayed, press Exit.
 To delete a change and re-enter values for a parameter, press Clear. (Clear
does not exit from the current menu.)
Each parameter menu is listed in alphabetical order in Table 2-1.

2-8 8186546 1999 June Rev. A


Section 2 – Controls and Indicators

Parameter Menu Table


Table 2-1. Parameter Menus

Parameter Menu Description

Audible Alerts – Provides a one beep indication at the keypad for


each successful image acquisition.
– Provides three short beeps at the keypad to alert
the operator that image acquisition has failed. Retry
another image acquisition.
Selections:
ON = Alarm sounds
OFF = No alarm sounds

(This parameter applies only to the optional keypad.)

Autoprint Determines whether the imager prints images as


soon as the Images Acquired and Format Selected
indicators on the keypad display the same value.
Selections:
ON:
Prints when the Images Acquired and
Format Selected indicators display the same
value.
To print fewer images than indicated by the
Format Selected indicator, press Print as
soon as Images Acquired shows the number
of copies you want.
OFF:
Prints only when you press the Print button.

Note: To print contrast samples, Autoprint must be


set to OFF.
(This parameter applies only to the optional keypad.)

1999 June Rev. A 8186546 2-9


DryView 8600 User Guide

Parameter Menu Description

Contrast Controls the amount of contrast in an image. Contrast


is the difference between the lighter and darker areas
of an image.
Range: 1 to 12
Use the contrast samples to choose the best value
and enter the number for that value.
(In a DICOM network, this parameter can be changed
only at the modality or in the PACS Link 9410
Acquisition System.)

Date/Time Changes date and time.


Press Enter to access each part of the date in turn or
the time.
A blinking cursor identifies the current value for each
part of the date or time.
Either use the numeric keypad to enter a new value,
or use the arrow buttons to change the value
displayed (such as the month or the year).

Density Controls the density of the image.


(In a DICOM network, this parameter can be changed
only at the modality or in the PACS Link 9410
Acquisition System.)

Detector Size Specifies the size of the pixels in the image to be


printed. This parameter is unused when Image Size
is Scale to Fit.
Note: This parameter is not user-adjustable.

Exposure Index This setting is for service only. Do not change.

Film Layout Allows you to select Format and Mode. (See those
entries in this table.)
(This parameter applies only to the optional keypad.)

2-10 8186546 1999 June Rev. A


Section 2 – Controls and Indicators

Parameter Menu Description

Format Determines the number of images that print on a


single sheet of film.

Gamma Table Specifies which of two sets of gamma tables will be


used to control image brightness and density: (1)
transmittance or (2) linear optical density.

The DryView 8600 creates the two sets of 16 gamma


tables each time it self-calibrates. The gamma tables
are used by the DryView 8600 in conjunction with
the current contrast setting to provide grayscale
optimization.

Note: This parameter is not user adjustable. The


appropriate set of gamma tables is selected by the
Field Engineer with the user’s input at installation.

Image Size Defines the size of the printed image.


Scale to Fit: Image will be magnified or
reduced to fit the image area on the film,
unless the parameter is overridden by the
modality.

Note: This parameter is not user adjustable.

Keypad Format Determines the default number that displays on the


Format Selected indicator. The Format parameter
controls the number of images that print on a single
sheet of film.
Range: 1, 2, 4, and 6
If you change this value at the keypad, the new value
is not retained when you switch off the imager. When
the imager is switched on again, the default value
present before the manual change will be
re-displayed.
(This parameter applies only to the optional keypad.)

1999 June Rev. A 8186546 2-11


DryView 8600 User Guide

Parameter Menu Description

Mode Allows setting printing mode to Landscape or Portrait.

Number of Copies Changes the number of copies printed.


Range: 1 to 99
(This parameter applies only to the optional keypad.)

Perform Calibration Prints a calibration step wedge using current settings,


then calibrates the densitometer.
Press Enter to start the calibration.
If a problem occurs during calibration, the imager
displays an error message. Refer to Troubleshooting,
Table 5-1, for information on how to deal with the
problem.

Polarity Determines whether image is printed as a positive or


negative.
Selections:
POSITIVE
If the acquired image is positive, prints a
positive image and vice versa.
NEGATIVE
Reverses the acquired print (a positive
acquired image is printed as a negative and
vice versa).

2-12 8186546 1999 June Rev. A


Section 2 – Controls and Indicators

Parameter Menu Description

Print Contrast Samples Prints contrast samples (uses the last acquired image
for the sample and current density).
To print samples, press Enter.
During printing, print progress is indicated. If no fault
appears during printing, returns to the Print Contrast
Samples menu. To stop printing, press Exit.
(In a DICOM network, this parameter can be changed
only at the modality or in the PACS Link 9410
Acquisition System.)

Sharp/Smooth Determines the sharpness or smoothness of the


printed image. Smooths out the jagged edges of the
pixels in an image as specified.
Selections:
Range: 1 to 6 or Auto
1 = Sharpest image
6 = Smoothest image
Auto = The imager determines the
best setting for the size of the image.

Current setting is marked by an asterisk (*).


(In a DICOM network, this parameter can be changed
only at the modality or in the PACS Link 9410
Acquisition System.)

1999 June Rev. A 8186546 2-13


DryView 8600 User Guide

BLANK PAGE

2-14 8186546 1999 June Rev. A


Section 3 – Operation

Operation

System Power Up
Set the imager power switch to ON. The following sequence occurs:
1. The imager performs a series of self-diagnostic tests.
2. If the power-on self-test is successful, the machine warms up for about 25
minutes.
3. After warmup, the machine calibrates the densitometer lamp.
4. After calibrating the densitometer lamp, the machine prints a calibration step
wedge.

Note
The system displays a message for each stage of system power up.

Figure 3-1. Power Switch, Local Panel and Optional Remote Keypad

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 3-1


DryView 8600 User Guide

Producing a Print from a Host Modality


After warmup and calibration, the DryView 8600 Laser Imager is ready to print.
Print commands are issued and controlled from the digital host modality.

Producing a Print Using the Optional Keypad

Note
The following procedure does not apply if the DryView 8600 Laser Imager is
being used in a DICOM network.

1. Power on the imager.


2. Wait for the green Imager Ready (1) indicator to illuminate.
3. Press Select (2) repeatedly until the desired number appears on the Format
Selected indicator (3).

Note
You can select a format only if no images are acquired or all acquired images
are printed.

4. To start image acquisition, press Acquire (4) or use the optional foot activated
switch (Foot Switch).
 If acquisition is successful, the Images Acquired (5) indicator increments
and one short beep is sounded.
 If acquisition is unsuccessful:
– The audible alarm of three short beeps sounds (if set to ON).
– The Images Acquired (5) indicator does not increment.
– The Check Imager (6) indicator lights
– An associated message appears on the local panel.

Note
The failure indication is visible only at the keypad where acquisition was
unsuccessful. After an unsuccessful attempt, you should try to acquire an
image again. If the acquire is successful, the Check Imager (6) indicator turns
off and the Images Acquired (5) indicator increments and one short beep is
sounded.

5. Repeat step 4 until all images are acquired.

3-2 8186546 2000 March Rev.B


Section 3 – Operation

Note
To delete images in reverse order, starting with the most recently acquired
image, press the Erase button (7). The Images Acquired (5) indicator
decrements as the images are deleted.

1 10

5 3
2
7

9 8

Figure 3-2. Optional Keypad

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 3-3


DryView 8600 User Guide

6. To print the images acquired at any time, press the Print button (8). Any blank
image locations are printed at background density.

Note
If Autoprint is ON, images also print when the number in the Images Acquired
indicator (5) equals the number in the Format Selected indicator (3).

Note
The number of images printed is determined by the Number of Copies to Print
setting.

7. To print additional copies, press Print (8) whenever the Press PRINT for
ADDITIONAL copy indicator (9) is illuminated. Each button press prints one
additional copy.

Note
If the Memory Full indicator (10) lights, wait until the indicator goes out before
pressing Acquire again.

Note
If the Check Imager indicator (6) lights with no associated beep when the
acquisitions are successful, there is a condition such as out of film, or film jam
at the imager, which is not currently affecting acquisitions.

Note
If a film jam occurs during printing, the Check Imager indicator (6) lights, and
the local panel displays an associated message. Clear the jam (see page 5-7,
Troubleshooting, for instructions). When the jam is cleared, the machine
restarts the print sequence.

3-4 8186546 2000 March Rev.B


Section 3 – Operation

1 10

5 3
2
7

9
8

Figure 3-3. Optional Keypad

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 3-5


DryView 8600 User Guide

Requesting Contrast Samples and Changing the Contrast Setting


The user can adjust both density and contrast for printed images. The density
setting is incremental, which means that the maximum density of a printed image
increases as the number of the density setting is increased.
The contrast setting is not incremental. The user must select a desired setting from
contrast examples of a printed image. You must select the procedure to print
contrast samples for the modality that you are using.

Note
If the DryView 8600 is being used in a DICOM network, the following
procedures to request contrast samples and adjust contrast do not apply.

Digital Modality with Host Control


A modality with host control capabilities usually defines and sends the density and
contrast information to the imager when the image data is sent, overriding the values
set at the imager’s local panel. If the modality does not send density and contrast
information, the user can define the settings at the local panel.
1. At the host, acquire an image, but do not send a print command.
A B
2. On the DryView 8600 local panel, press Setup or Setup (see Figure 3-4) to select
the menu that represents the host-controlled modality from which you will print
contrast samples.

3. Press to go to item 3, Print Contrast Samples, and then press Enter .


(The DryView 8600 automatically prints 12 copies of the previously acquired
image at different contrasts.)
4. Select the image that you prefer, and note the image number associated with it.

5. On the local panel, press to go to item 2, Contrast.

6. Following the instructions on the display, change the contrast setting to the
number previously selected from the contrast samples. Then press Enter .

7. After setting the contrast, press Exit


to return the DryView 8600 to service.

3-6 8186546 2000 March Rev.B


Section 3 – Operation

Figure 3-4. Changing the Contrast Setting

Digital Modality with Remote Keypad


1. On the modality, select and display the image you want to use for printing
contrast samples.
2. On the DryView 8600 remote keypad, select a format other than 1. (For
example, use 2, 4, or 6.)
3. Press Acquire on the keypad.
A B
4. On the local panel, press Setup or Setup to select the menu that represents the
host-controlled modality from which you will print contrast samples.

5. On the local panel, press to go to item 3, Print Contrast Samples, and

then press Enter . (The DryView 8600 automatically prints 12 copies of the
previously acquired image at different contrasts.)
6. Select the image that you prefer, and note the image number associated with it.

7. On the local panel, press to go to item 2, Contrast.

8. Following the instructions on the display, change the contrast setting to the
number previously selected from the contrast samples, then press Enter .

9. After setting the contrast, press Exit


to return the DryView 8600 to service.

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 3-7


DryView 8600 User Guide

Loading/Unloading the Film Tray

Note
Leave the DryView 8600 Laser Imager on while loading or unloading the film
tray. If you remove power from the imager while the system is in use, any
previously acquired images stored in memory will be lost.

1. When 100 sheets of Kodak DryView Mammography Laser Imaging Film have
been used, the tray unlocks automatically, and instructions for tray removal are
displayed on the local panel. (See Figure 3-5.)
2. Swing open the handle of the film tray.
3. Important: Remove the old film insert and any unused “liner” sheet of film from
the tray and dispose of them per local disposal regulations. (The liner sheet
contains a trace of silver.)

Note
Before loading a new package of film, clean the inside surface of the film tray,
including the ramp and top edge of the tray. Use an alcohol soaked pad such
as TexPad TX801.

4. Press the film package down in the tray as follows: Press the film package to the
left, against the soft guide, with the black plastic bag tail lapping through the
handle, and the label up. Press down firmly using both hands so the film
package sits flat against the bottom of the tray.
5. Swing the handle of the film tray back in place.
6. Remove the tear strip from the black plastic bag.
7. Slide the tray back into the imager slot.
8. To remove the black plastic bag so the imager can access the Kodak DryView
Mammography Laser Imaging Film, pull the black plastic bag tail firmly and
smoothly. The entire film bag should slide out.
9. Dispose of the black plastic bag.

10. To continue processing images, press Enter on the local panel.

3-8 8186546 2000 March Rev.B


Section 3 – Operation

Figure 3-5. Loading/Unloading Film

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 3-9


DryView 8600 User Guide

BLANK PAGE

3-10 8186546 2000 March Rev.B


Section 4 – Quality Control Procedures

Section 4 – Quality Control Procedures

Compliance Guidance – Quality Control for Laser Imagers used in


Digital Mammography Systems
These Quality Control Procedures are intended to provide guidance for
mammography facilities and their personnel. They represent the equipment
manufacturer ’s views on the appropriate procedures for conducting Quality Control
tests for digital mammography and observing the Mammography Quality Standards
Act (MQSA). The following procedures represent acceptable ways of doing the tests,
but unlike regulations, they are not binding. Alternate procedures may be used if
they satisfy the requirements of the applicable statute, regulations, or both. It is the
responsibility of the mammography facility to read, understand, and follow the
regulations.
Under its own authority, a state may impose requirements more stringent than those
imposed in the FDA Mammography Quality Standards Act. A facility should check
with state or local authorities regarding their requirements.

Automatic Image Quality Control and the QC Process


The Kodak DryView 8600 Laser Imager / for Mammography has a built-in Automatic
Image Quality Control (AIQC) system that automatically compensates for film lot
variations, ensuring consistent print densities. The MQSA requires that the
mammography facility establish a quality control (QC) process that verifies the
effectiveness of the AIQC system. Kodak’s recommendations below are based on
the MQSA and the QC process described in the Radiologic Technologist’s Section of
the Mammography Quality Control Manual, W 1999, published by the American
College of Radiology. This QC process has been adapted to apply to the special
features of Kodak DryView Mammography Laser Imaging Film and the
characteristics of the Kodak DryView 8600 Laser Imager. The procedures outlined
below assume that the user has been trained in operation of the Kodak DryView
8600 Laser Imager.

Running a QC Baseline Test


Per the MQSA, a baseline test must be run when the 8600 is first installed, and must
be repeated every time a box of film with a different emulsion number is used. This
test sets up a baseline set of film parameter values that shall be used as a standard
for comparison in daily quality control tests. Kodak recommends the procedure
described below as a means of complying with this regulation.

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 4-1


DryView 8600 User Guide

Procedure for the Installing Field Engineer – The installing field engineer verifies
that the 8600 meets its performance specifications, runs the baseline test described
below, and prints a clinical image of the site’s choice. The site’s responsible
healthcare professional is asked to approve that the 8600 produces an acceptable
clinical image. If the image is not acceptable, the field engineer repeats his
procedures until the settings for the baseline print produce acceptable clinical
images.
Procedure for the QC Technologist – After an acceptable installation, the user
facility’s technologist must repeat the baseline test whenever a change occurs in
emulsion lots.
Baseline Test
1. Apply power to the 8600 and allow it to warm to READY, as indicated on the
local panel. The 8600 will print a film calibration sheet, to put its Automatic Image
Quality Control (AIQC) system in control.
2. Print a QC Step Wedge test film. ( Refer to page 5-15 in this User Guide for the
procedure. See Figure 4-1 on the next page for a sample step wedge,)
3. Repeat printing QC Step Wedge films until you have accumulated five test films.
4. Using a densitometer, read and record the density of each step (1 through 21) on
each of the five test films. (For consistency from film to film, always read density
at the center of each wedge.)

Note
You can choose to use a clear area on the test films instead of the actual step
1 to take the “step 1” density readings.

5. Determine and record the average of the five densities read for each step.
6. Select from the average values calculated from the 21 steps to determine the
film parameter values as follows:
a. Determine which step has a density closest to 2.20. Then determine which
step has a density closest to but not less than 0.45. Designate the difference
between these densities as Density Difference (DD).
b. Determine which step has an average density closest to but not less than
1.20. Designate this step as Medium Density (MD).
c. Designate the average for Step 1 (or the clear area on the film) as Base Plus
Fog.

4-2 8186546 2000 March Rev. B


Section 4 – Quality Control Procedures

d. Record the numeric values of DD, MD and Base Plus Fog on the center lines
of the Laser imager QC Chart. (See Figure 4-2.) Record also the step
numbers involved.

Figure 4-1. QC Step Wedge

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 4-3


DryView 8600 User Guide

Density
Difference

HD Step #___
–HD Step #___

Medium
Density

Step #___

Base
Plus Fog

Figure 4-2. Quality Control Chart

4-4 8186546 2000 March Rev. B


Section 4 – Quality Control Procedures

Running a Daily QC Test


The MQSA requires that a sensitometric test be run daily and that clinical images be
made only when the control chart is within the control ranges. Kodak recommends
the following laser imager test. Perform this test daily before clinical mammograms
are run, to ensure quality output. Plot the values obtained from the test on the Laser
Imager QC Chart for comparison with the film parameter values established in the
baseline test.
1. Apply power to the 8600 and allow it to warm to READY, as indicated on the
local panel. (The 8600 will print a film calibration sheet, indicating that its
Automatic Image Quality Control system is functioning.)
2. Print a QC Step Wedge film per the procedure on page 5-15 of this User Guide.
3. Use a densitometer to read the designated steps on the test film. Read at the
center of each step. If a clear area on the film was used instead of step 1 in the
baseline tests (see page 4-2), use a clear area in this QC test.
4. Record the date on the control chart. Then plot the DD, MD, and Base Plus Fog
values in the appropriate column on the chart.
5. Determine if any of the values exceeds the control limits for the parameter.

Note
The numbers above and below the center lines on the chart indicate the
control limits. For example, for DD or MD, 0.10 above or below the center line is
approaching the limit, but is acceptable. However, 0.15 above or below the line
is not acceptable.

6. If the values did not exceed a control limit, examine the chart and see if there is
a trend which suggests possible future problems. (This could be, for example,
three or more data points for DD, MD or Base Plus Fog in succession moving
upward or downward.) If the data points have not exceeded the limits, clinical
mammograms can continue to be run.
7. If any value exceeds a control limit, DO NOT run clinical mammograms until the
problem is corrected. Proceed as follows:
a. Circle the out of control point(s) on the chart.
b. Correct the problem. (The fault could be in the film, imager or densitometer,
or in the performance of the QC procedure.)
c. Note the cause of the problem in the “Remarks” section of the control chart.
d. Repeat the step wedge test and graph the parameters on the control chart.

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 4-5


DryView 8600 User Guide

BLANK PAGE

4-6 8186546 2000 March Rev. B


Section 5 – Troubleshooting

Section 5 – Troubleshooting

Local Panel and Remote Keypad Message Types


The local panel displays two types of messages:
 Status Messages – Provide information and require no operator action.
 Error Messages – Indicate an error condition inside the imager. Some
messages tell you what action to take to fix the error, but in some cases a
service call is needed to deal with a problem. If the error message does not clear
after you perform the specified action, call for service.
Table 5-1 lists all messages that can appear on the two lines of the local panel
display:
 The Information Line (line 1) of each display contains the error title and (in most
cases) a two-digit error code.
 The Action Line (line 2) contains additional information/procedures about the
error condition.

Note
The keypad indicates that an error has occurred by flashing the Check Imager
indicator, which refers the operator to the imager’s local panel for more detailed
error information.

Local Panel Messages


If the Operator Action specified in Table 5-1 does not correct the machine problem,
call for service (see page 5-20).
Table 5-1. Operator Related Local Panel Messages
Message Operator Action
ASIC LINE BUFFER FAIL (48) Power the imager off, wait 10-20
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO seconds, then power back on. If
CONTINUE message reappears, call for service.
ASIC SELF TEST FAIL (60) Power the imager off, wait 10-20
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO seconds, then power back on. If
CONTINUE message reappears, call for service.

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 5-1


DryView 8600 User Guide

Message Operator Action


A TO D CONVERTER FAILURE (88) Power the imager off, wait 10-20
POWER IMAGER OFF, THEN BACK ON seconds, then power back on. If
message reappears, call for service.
CALIBRATION FAILED (69) Press Enter. Then stand by while
PRESS ENTER TO LOAD DEFAULT GAMMA imager automatically loads default
TABLES tables. Make sure to check image
quality.
CALIBRATION FAIL: Dmin HI, Dmax XXX.X (70) Press Enter. Then stand by while
PRESS ENTER TO BUILD GAMMA TABLES imager automatically builds gamma
tables. If image quality is unacceptable,
use new film.
DEVELOPER OVER TEMPERATURE (17) Unable to control temperature. Power
POWER IMAGER OFF, THEN BACK ON imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
power back on. If message reappears,
call for service.
DEVELOPER UNDER TEMPERATURE (19) Unable to control temperature. Power
POWER IMAGER OFF, THEN BACK ON imager off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
power back on. If message reappears,
call for service.
DOUBLE FILM FEED – REMOVE MISFEED (24) Insert the film saver and remove the film
INSERT FILM SAVER TO REMOVE FILM TRAY tray. Discard any sheets of film that are
jammed in the machine. If problem
persists, call for service.
DYNAMIC RAM FAILURE (72) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE then power back on. If message
reappears, call for service.
FILM TRAPPED INSIDE EXPOSURE AREA (23) Insert the film saver. Raise the cover
CALL SERVICE – IMAGER IS INOPERABLE and remove the film from the exposure
area. Close the cover and remove the
film saver. Press Enter to continue. If
film can’t be removed, call for service.
FILM TRAY EMPTY – INSERT FILM (29) Imager is out of film. Remove film tray
and load a new film package.
FILM TRAY UNLOCKED (11). Remove and reinsert film tray into
INSERT FILM TRAY FULLY TO CLEAR ERROR Imager.

5-2 8186546 2000 March Rev. B


Section 5 – Troubleshooting

Message Operator Action


FLASH EPROM FAILURE (75) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE reappears, call for service.
GALVANOMETER FAILURE (45) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE reappears, call for service.
IMAGE MEMORY FOR INPUT A (B) IS FULL Press Enter to continue. As films are
(80) PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE printed, memory will become available.
IMAGER OFF-LINE Press Enter to place imager in service.
PRESS ENTER TO PLACE IMAGER IN
SERVICE

IMAGER OPEN (16) Be sure the top cover is closed and


CLOSE COVER latched.
INPUT A (B) ACQUISITION TIMEOUT (66) Retry image acquire. Check wire
connections from the modality to the
imager. If problem persists, call for
service.
INPUT A (B) DMA FAILURE (74) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE reappears, call for service.
INPUT A (B) FIFO NOT EMPTY FAILURE (67) Reacquire the image to be printed.
INPUT A (B) HEADER FAILURE (64) Try acquiring an image again. If problem
persists, call for service.
INPUT A (B) IDENTIFY ERROR (63) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE reappears, call for service.
INPUT A (B) IMAGE SIZES NOT IDENTICAL Verify the image is the same size as the
(35) PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE previously captured image.
INPUT A (B) IMAGE TOO LARGE TO PRINT Maximum image size is 6.1 megabytes.
(37) Retry with a smaller image.
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

INPUT A (B) OVERFLOW FAILURE (65) Try acquiring an image again. If problem
persists, call for service.

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 5-3


DryView 8600 User Guide

Message Operator Action


INPUT A (B) PROGRAM MEMORY FULL Press Enter to continue.
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE
INPUT A (B) SYNC FAILURE (39) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds,
then power back on. If message
reappears, call for service.
INPUT A (B) UNDERFLOW FAILURE (62) Try acquiring an image again. If problem
persists, call for service.
INSERT FILM TRAY (12) Insert the film tray.
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY FOR IMAGE FILE A Press Enter to continue. As films are
(B) (81) PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE printed, memory will become available.
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY FOR PRINTSET A (B) Press Enter to continue. As films are
(82) PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE printed, memory will become available.
INVALID DATA RECEIVED FROM INPUT A (B) Call for service.
(53) - PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

LAMP FAILED TO REACH TEMPERATURE (71) Call for service.


PRESS ENTER TO LOAD DEFAULT GAMMA
TABLES

LASER BOARD FAILURE (46) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE reappears, call for service.
LOADING DEFAULT GAMMA TABLES Automatic operation. Verify image
quality.
LOCAL PANEL BUFFER OVERFLOW (85) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE reappears, call for service.
LOCAL PANEL RAM FAILURE (73) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE. reappears, call for service.
MAXIMUM DENSITY LESS THAN 3.5 No action required.
NO IMAGE ACQUIRED ON INPUT A (B) (68) Reacquire an image.
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

NON-VOLATILE CLOCK RAM FAILURE (96) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE reappears, call for service.

5-4 8186546 2000 March Rev. B


Section 5 – Troubleshooting

Message Operator Action


NON-VOLATILE RAM FAILURE (97) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE reappears, call for service.
NO RESPONSE FROM KEYPAD A (B) (78) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds,
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE then power back on. If message
reappears, call for service.
NO RESPONSE FROM INPUT A (B) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds,
then power back on. If message
reappears, call for service.
PERFORMING CALIBRATION None.
PERFORMING SELF-TEST None.
POWER DISTRIBUTION FAILURE (49) Power imager off, wait 10-20 seconds,
TURN OFF IMAGER – CALL SERVICE then power back on. If message
reappears, call for service.
PRINT JOB LIST FULL (86) Wait until some films have printed
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE before sending more images to print.
REGULATING TEMPERATURE Imager adjusting temperature. If not
completed in 45 minutes, call service.
REMOVE FILM FROM EXIT AREA (28) Insert the film saver. Raise the cover
INSERT FILM SAVER TO REMOVE FILM TRAY and remove film from the exit area.
Close cover and remove the film saver.
Press Enter to continue.
REMOVE FILM SAVER (31) Remove the film saver from the tray.
REMOVE FILM TRAY (40) Insert film saver and remove film tray.
REMOVE, LOAD, AND INSERT FILM TRAY (12) Remove the film tray, load film, and
re-install the film tray.
REMOVE, LOAD, AND INSERT FILM TRAY (30) Press Enter. Remove the film tray, load
PRESS ENTER WHEN READY TO REMOVE film, and re-install the tray.
TRAY

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 5-5


DryView 8600 User Guide

Message Operator Action


REMOVE MISFEED FROM DEVELOPER AREA Film stopped in the developer area.
(27) Check for blockage of film path from
INSERT FILM SAVER TO REMOVE FILM TRAY developer. Insert film saver. Raise cover
and open the developer cover. Remove
the film sheet and close the developer
cover. Close the cover and remove the
film saver. Press Enter to continue.
REMOVE MISFEED FROM EXPOSURE AREA Insert film saver. Raise cover and
(22) INSERT FILM SAVER TO REMOVE FILM remove film from exposure area. Close
TRAY cover and remove film saver. Press
Enter to continue.
REMOVE MISFEED FROM FILM TRAY (20) Insert film saver. Remove film tray.
INSERT FILM SAVER TO REMOVE FILM TRAY Remove misfed film sheet.
REPEATED ERROR DURING EXPOSURE (50) Press Enter to print all queued images.
PRESS ENTER TO PRINT ALL QUEUED Call for service if error persists.
IMAGES

TIMEOUT WAITING FOR FILM TRAY REMOVAL Press Enter. Then remove the film tray
– PRESS ENTER WHEN READY TO REMOVE when the release latch is activated.
TRAY

UNABLE TO FEED FILM (33) Message is displayed after third attempt


PRESS ENTER TO TRY AGAIN to feed film. Insert the film saver and
remove the film carrier from the imager.
Gently shake the film carrier. Remove
any film stuck in film tray cavity of
imager and reinsert tray. Press Enter to
try again.
UNABLE TO UNLOCK FILM TRAY (34) Manually depress the film carrier
REMOVE FILM TRAY MANUALLY TO release button on the imager and
CONTINUE remove film tray manually.
UNASSIGNED ERROR CONDITION Call for service.
VERY FEW STEPS IN TOE OF DLOG E CURVE Examine the quality of the calibration
VERIFY IMAGE QUALITY print. You may have to try new film.
WAIT FOR SHEET TO EXIT BEFORE Wait for sheet to exit before removing
REMOVING TRAY FROM IMAGER tray from imager.
WARMING UP None.

5-6 8186546 2000 March Rev. B


Section 5 – Troubleshooting

Clearing Film Jams – General


The film jam areas referred to in local display error messages are shown in
Figure 5-1.
 A is the film tray area, where film misfeeds can possibly occur.
 B and C identify the rollers on either side of the exposure area.
 D and E identify the developer and film exit areas.

C
D Film Tray

B A

8300–1
83L

Figure 5-1. Possible Film Jam Locations

The following pages provide procedures for clearing film jams from all the areas
identified above. Before performing any of the procedues you must install the film
saver on the film tray, and remove the film tray from the machine.

Note
Shutting off power to clear a film jam is not required. Shutting off the power
deletes all currently acquired (but unprinted) images and may clear some
error messages. If you do this, you will have to resend the unprinted images to
the imager.

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 5-7


DryView 8600 User Guide

Inserting the Film Saver and Removing the Film Tray


1. Insert the film saver and remove the film tray as shown in Figure 5-2.
2. If the film tray does not pull out, use a pen or pencil to push the tray release
button located on the left side of the film tray. See Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-2. Inserting the Film Saver and Removing the Film Tray

Film Tray
Release Button 8300-135A

Figure 5-3. Releasing the Film Tray

5-8 8186546 2000 March Rev. B


Section 5 – Troubleshooting

Clearing Jams from the Film Tray Area


1. Check to see if a jam has occurred in the film tray, or film is partially protruding
from the tray.
2. Check inside the tray opening of the machine for jammed film.
3. If you cannot locate the jam, raise the top cover after pushing in the button on
the right side of the machine (see Figure 5-4). Then proceed to the next
paragraph.

Figure 5-4. Raising the Top Cover

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 5-9


DryView 8600 User Guide

Clearing Jams from the Exposure Area


With the top cover open, allow time for the developer to cool. Visually check for a
film jam in the interior of the machine.
1. Lift the wire guide for access to film in the bottom of the machine. See Figure
5-5.
2. Place the wire guide in the upward position as shown in Figure 5-5.
3. Remove any film jams.
4. Return the wire guide to its original position. Make sure it snaps into place.

1 2

3 4

Figure 5-5. Clearing Film Jams in the Exposure Area

5-10 8186546 2000 March Rev. B


Section 5 – Troubleshooting

Clearing Jams from the Developer and Exit Areas

Safety Precautions
Take care working around the developer area. The developer drum is hot during
normal system operation. When the machine top cover is raised, power is
disconnected from the drum and it begins to cool down. However, up to an hour may
elapse before the drum is cool.

!
Caution
Do not touch the developer drum.

8300-128A

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 5-11


DryView 8600 User Guide

Clearing the Developer or Exit Jam


1. Open the top cover and unlatch the developer assembly cover (see Figure 5-6).
2. Open the developer assembly cover and allow time for the developer to cool.
3. Pull to remove any jammed film. (Caution: The film may still be hot.) To aid in
removing the film, you may rotate the drum by turning the gear on the left side of
the drum.
4. Close and latch the cover.

1 2

8300-32A 8300-33A

3 4

8300-34A
8300-35A

Figure 5-6. Clearing Film Jams from the Developer and Exit Areas

Note
Check to see that all jams reported by error messages have been corrected. If
additional error messages have occurred, they may recur after the power-up
self test. If they do, refer to Table 5-1 for instructions.

5-12 8186546 2000 March Rev. B


Section 5 – Troubleshooting

System Tests
Use the test menus to test DryView 8600 Laser Imager operation.

Note
While running system tests, you cannot acquire and print images.
You can run the following tests on the imager:
1. QC Step Wedge – Prints a QC step wedge for use in the daily quality control
process (see Section 4).
2. Print SMPTE Pattern – Prints four stored test pattern images on one film.
3. Keypad Test – Tests keypad and individual key functions.
4. Display Software Versions – Displays versions for software programs that run
the imager.
5. Display System Configuration – Displays current system configuration values
such as image memory, contrast and density parameters for each input (user).

Test Menus

QC Step Wedge
See page 5-15

Print SMPTE
Pattern 4:1
See page 5-15

Keypad Test
See page 5-16

Display Software
Versions
See page 5-17

Display System
Configuration
See page 5-18

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 5-13


DryView 8600 User Guide

Menu Buttons
Use the following buttons to access, start, and exit test menus:
1. Test Button – Accesses test menus.
2. Down Arrow Button – Scrolls to the next test. From the last test, scrolls to the
first test.
3. Up Arrow Button – Scrolls to the previous test. From the first test, scrolls to the
last test.
4. Enter Button – After you access a test menu, allows required conditions to be
set or starts a test.
5. Exit Button – Cancels a test or a parameter change.

Figure 5-7. Menu Buttons

5-14 8186546 2000 March Rev. B


Section 5 – Troubleshooting

Print QC Step Wedge


To print a QC step wedge:

1. Access the QC Step Wedge menu by pressing Test


.

2. Initiate the test print by pressing Enter .

 If the step wedge prints successfully, the Print QC Step Wedge menu is
again displayed.
 If a fault occurs, an error message is displayed.

3. To cancel the test, press Exit


. The system displays a “PRINT CANCELLED BY
OPERATOR” message.

4. To return to “System Ready,” press Exit


.

Print SMPTE Pattern


To run a Print SMPTE Pattern test:

1. From the QC Step Wedge menu, press to access the Print SMPTE Pattern
display.

2. To print the SMPTE pattern, press Enter .

 Follow instructions on the local panel to set up conditions for the test.
 If the print completes successfully, the Print SMPTE Pattern menu is
displayed.
 If a fault occurs, an error message is displayed.

3. To cancel the print, press Exit


. The system displays a TEST CANCELLED BY
OPERATOR message.

4. To return to the first Print SMPTE Pattern menu, press Exit


.

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 5-15


DryView 8600 User Guide

Keypad Test
Before you can run a keypad test, a remote keypad must be attached to the imager.
To run a keypad test for one of the input modules :

1. From the Print SMPTE Pattern display, press to access the Keypad Test
menu.

2. To start the Keypad Test, press Enter .

During the first part of the keypad test, the menu shows test progress.
3. When the first part of the test is complete, the menu prompts you to press any
key. To test individual key function, press each key in turn.
Each time you press a key, the menu should identify the pressed key.

Example: If you press Erase , the menu should show that you pressed it.

4. To cancel the test, press Exit


. The system displays a “TEST CANCELLED BY
OPERATOR” message.

5. To return to the first Keypad Test menu, press Exit


.

6. To perform the keypad test on the other input module, press and repeat
steps 2 through 5.

5-16 8186546 2000 March Rev. B


Section 5 – Troubleshooting

Display Software Versions


The imager contains the following types of software.
 Imager Firmware
 VRTX32
 Contrast Tables
 Convolution Kernel
If you need to check the version of one of these software programs, access the
software versions as follows:

1. From the Keypad Test display, press to access the Display Software
Versions menu. Use this menu to access the software versions.

2. To see the current Imager Firmware version, press Enter :

IMAGER FIRMWARE 2.0

3. To access the VRTX32 version, press :

VRTX32 1.0.8

4. To access the Contrast Tables version, press :

CONTRAST TABLES 6.0.1

5. To access the Convolution Kernel version, press :

CONVOLUTION KERNEL 1.0.5

6. To return to the Display Software Versions menu, press Exit


.

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 5-17


DryView 8600 User Guide

Display System Configuration


This parameter allows the system configuration values to be displayed. The
configuration values appear in the order listed below:

1. DRAM
See page 5-19

2. Contrast Tables
See page 5-19

3. Density
See page 5-19

4. Convolution
See page 5-19

5. Copies
See page 5-19

6. User’s ID
See page 5-19

7. Protocol
See page 5-19

8. Modality
See page 5-19

To display system configuration values:


1. To access the Display System Configuration menu, from the Display Software
Versions menu, press .

2. Press Enter to access each of the menus listed in Table 5-2.

5-18 8186546 2000 March Rev. B


Section 5 – Troubleshooting

Configuration Menu Table


Table 5-2. Configuration Menus

Configuration Menu Description


DRAM (Memory) Displays current DRAM configuration. The DRAM
display shows how the image memory is configured
between the two input modules.
Example:
A: 64.00 B: 0
CONTRAST TABLES Shows the contrast table selected for each input.
Example:
A: 12 B: 7
DENSITY Shows the density setting selected for each input.
Example:
A: 5 B: 9
CONVOLUTION Shows the convolution setting for each input.
(Sharp/Smooth) Example:
A: AUTO B: 4
COPIES Shows the copies to print setting for each input.
Example:
A: 1 B: 1
USER’S ID Shows the user’s ID setting for each input.
Example:
A: DIGITAL B: DIGITAL
PROTOCOL Shows the control protocol setting for each input.
Example:
A: 3M B: 3M
MODALITY Shows the input module installed for each input.
Example:
A: DIGITAL B: DIGITAL

2000 March Rev. B 8186546 5-19


DryView 8600 User Guide

Calling for Support


Once you have tried the recommended troubleshooting procedures on the preceding
pages, but are unable to repair the machine, it is time to call for help.
Before you call for Service, have the following information ready:
Model Number: 8600
Serial Number: (For serial number location, see page iv.)
Phone for Service (U.S.): 1-800-328-7754, Option 1

Note
For general information about Kodak Health Imaging Products, call
1-800-328-2910, Option 3.

5-20 8186546 2000 March Rev. B


Section 6 – Specifications

Section 6– Specifications

Dimensions
Height: 46 cm (18 in.)
Width: 46 cm (18 in.)
Depth: 66 cm (26 in.)
Weight: 56 Kg (124 lb)

Electrical
Phase: Single
Voltage: 100 - 240 VAC "10%
50 - 60 Hz "3 Hz
Power 800 Watts maximum

Operating Environment
Temperature: 15° to 32° C (59° to 90° F)
Relative Humidity: 15% to 75% RH, Non-condensing
Magnetic Field: 100 Gauss (Max)
Barometric Pressure 20.76 in. Hg to 31.3 in. Hg
700 hPa to 1060 hPa

Non-Operating Environment: Shipping and Storage


Temperature: 15° to 32° C (59° to 90° F) for 24 hours
Relative Humidity: 15% RH for 96 hr. to 85% RH, Non-condensing for 24 hr.
Barometric Pressure 14.76 in. Hg to 31.3 in. Hg
500 hPa to 1060 hPa

Interface Modules
3M Standard Digital

1999 June Rev. A 8186546 6-1


DryView 8600 User Guide

Control Interfaces
Control Panel
Remote Keypad
Host

Output
First Print (after Ready indicator lights): Approximately 185 Seconds
Subsequent Prints: Approximately 25 Prints/Hr

Film Characteristics
Size: 8-inch by 10-inch
Cartridge Capacity: 100 Sheets

Options
Second Input Module

Agency Compliance
See “Agency Approvals” in the Safety, EMC, and CE Marking paragraph at the
beginnnng of this manual.

Restrictions
The Kodak DryView 8600 Laser Imager/ for Mammography cannot be used in
the presence of flammable anesthetic gas mixtures.
Only factory trained personnel are authorized to install and service the DryView
8600.
Circuit drawings are made available to the service technician.

6-2 8186546 1999 June Rev. A


Section 7 – Technical Information

Section 7 – Technical Information


Kodak DryView Mammography Laser Imaging Film is a high-resolution,
infrared-sensitive, photothermographic film designed specifically for the DryView
8600 Laser Imager.
This new film delivers the same diagnostic image quality you get with your current
silver halide laser films – but it requires no “wet” chemistry, no “wet” film processors,
and no darkroom procedures. Which means there is no need for special plumbing,
wet chemistry disposal procedures, or modifications to your facility. This new film is
packaged in daylight load packages and is available in 8 inch by 10 inch size. It is
available in blue 7 mil polyester base.

Spectral Sensitivity
Kodak DryView Mammography Laser Imaging Film is infrared sensitive and has
been sensitized to the infrared laser diode of DryView Laser Imaging Systems.
When the film is handled according to instructions on the film package, safelights are
not needed. If you wish to remove undeveloped film from the daylight load package,
you will need a darkroom setting and a green safelight.

Image Quality
Kodak DryView Mammography Laser Imaging Film delivers diagnostic-quality,
continuous-tone images along with sharp alphanumerics and optimum contrast. This
high-quality silver-based film provides radiologists with diagnostic information similar
to that they are accustomed to viewing – including the spatial resolution, contrast,
and gray levels. Plus, because it is a totally dry imaging process, there is no image
quality variability due to “wet” chemistry.

Image Sharpness
Image sharpness is an important parameter for understanding image quality in
mammography. Image sharpness is determined by measuring the Sharpness
Transfer Function (STF) of square wave modulated bar patterns (on–off–on, etc.) of
various spatial frequencies.
The STF was calculated for the Kodak DryView 8600 Laser Imaging System using
the equation STF = (Dmax – Dmin)/(Dmax + Dmin), where Dmax is the maximum
density of the bars and Dmin is the minimum density between the bars. In order to
determine the STF, the DryView 8600 Laser Imager printed on–off–on bar patterns
on the film with various spatial frequencies at a maximum density of 3.5 OD.

1999 June Rev. A 8186546 7-1


DryView 8600 User Guide

The spatial density variations of the bar patterns were measured by a


microdensitometer and the STF was determined. A plot of the average STF of
horizontal and vertical bars is shown below.

Average STF vs. Spatial Frequency for DryView Media


Exposed and Processed in DryView 8600 Laser Imager

Automatic Image Quality Control


Kodak DryView Mammography Laser Imaging Film is system-matched for use with
Kodak’s unique Automatic Image Quality Control technology. This technology, which
is a standard feature of DryView Laser Imaging Systems, is designed to ensure that
contrast, density, and other image quality parameters meet preset user preferences,
package-to-package, lot-to-lot.

7-2 8186546 1999 June Rev. A


Section 7 – Technical Information

Less Impact on the Environment


Disposal regulations and procedures for “wet” processing chemistry are
time-consuming and expensive. And even with the most exacting procedures, the
potential to discharge hazardous materials into the environment exists.
Tests show that DryView Mammography Laser Imaging Film is not considered
hazardous to the environment. As a result, you can develop, recycle, and dispose of
films with less impact on the environment than if you were using wet developed
silver halide films.

DryView Mammography Laser Imaging Film


Environmental Regulations Comparison
Wet Silver Halide DryView

Developer Fixer Wash Film Film


Product
Regulation
OSHA MSDS Yes Yes No No No
DOT Hazard Yes Yes No No No
Use Permits Local* Local* Local* No No
Disposal
Regulation**
EPA Hazard Yes Yes Yes No No
DOT Hazard Yes Yes No No No
Local Sewer Yes Yes Yes NA NA
Authority

Note: There is no SUPERFUND liability with DryView Mammography Laser Imaging Film.

* “Local” = Regulated in many/most localities.


** State and local laws vary. Consult appropriate regulations or authorities prior to disposal.

1999 June Rev. A 8186546 7-3


DryView 8600 User Guide

Storage and Handling of Undeveloped Film


As with other laser imaging films, to achieve consistent results 77°F 25°C
up to the expiration date indicated on the film package, 41°F 5°C
DryView Mammography Laser Imaging Film must be stored in
a cool, dry place (41°F/5°C to 77°F/25°C) and protected from
radiation and chemistry fumes. TEMP

The film can withstand short-term temperature spikes (up to 95°F/35°C for several
hours) during transit without any significant effect on film quality or performance.
Transit temperatures above 95°F/35°C will gradually diminish shelf life. If the
Automatic Image Quality Control (AIQC) system encounters film that has been
damaged by improper handling, it will automatically alert system operators before
the film is developed.

Handling of Developed Film


Like other photographic films or data storage materials, the handling of DryView
Mammography Laser Imaging Film requires reasonable care. Spills, humidity, and
other moisture typically have no significant effect on developed films. Prolonged
exposure to intense light or excessive heat (130°F/54.4°C for more than three hours)
may cause some gradual darkening of images. Leaving films in vehicles in hot
climates for extended periods of time is not recommended.
Under typical working conditions, DryView Mammography Laser Imaging Film will
maintain diagnostic quality for over 100 years. For best results, store film in sleeves
when not being reviewed. DryView Mammography Laser Imaging Film can be left
on a light box for more than 24 hours; in extreme cases in which light boxes are
exceptionally hot (120°F/49°C), we recommend removing them prior to eight hours
of continuous exposure.
Care should be taken when using spotlight viewing for more than 30 seconds,
because temperatures near the light source may exceed 180°F/82.2°C. “Cool” hot
lights should be used. Use in slide projectors is not recommended due to the high
temperatures generally found in these devices.
With the new DryView technology, a small amount of final development occurs when
the film exits the DryView Laser Imager and is initially exposed to ambient or view
box lighting. This is virtually undetectable and has no effect on image quality (i.e.,
less than 0.02 change in density). This small density increase is uniform and
permanent upon full exposure of the film under normal handling conditions (i.e.,
room light or view box).

7-4 8186546 1999 June Rev. A


Section 7 – Technical Information

Archivability of Developed Film


DryView Mammography Laser Imaging Film is fully archivable for more than 100
years when stored at American National Standards Institute (ANSI) recommended
storage conditions (77°F/25°C). Developed films may be stored at higher
temperatures, but that may affect archivability. For example, storing films at a
constant elevated temperature of 90°F/32.2°C may reduce archivability to 15 years.

Exposure to Moisture
While moisture can damage traditional wet processed silver halide films, DryView
Mammography Laser Imaging Films typically withstand humidity, spills, and other
forms of water without any significant effect on image quality or film integrity. If
needed, films can be cleaned with a clean, damp cloth.

Odor Dissipation
The “wet” chemistry associated with the development of silver halide film creates
strong, unpleasant odors. By eliminating “wet” chemistry, DryView technology
eliminates virtually all of these processing odors. While some low-level odors are
produced during the development process, they pose no known adverse health
risks. Processing odor levels are further reduced by a non-hazardous filter in
DryView Laser Imaging Systems. This filter traps most low-level odors and prevents
them from dissipating into the work environment. To help maintain optimum
performance, the filter requires periodic replacement. Unlike silver halide systems,
DryView Laser Imagers require no special venting.

Heat Dissipation
DryView Laser Imaging Systems use controlled heat to develop DryView Laser
Imaging Films. The heat has virtually no effect on the air temperature of the work
area. The amount of heat dissipated into an area during a day is typically less than
the heat generated by four 100-watt light bulbs.

1999 June Rev. A 8186546 7-5


DryView 8600 User Guide

Film Recycling
According to U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) standards, DryView
Mammography Laser Imaging Film is not considered hazardous – it requires no
special disposal procedures. But it does contain silver and polyester that may be
recovered by using one of several recycling processes.
If you are interested in recycling and silver recovery, Kodak can provide your local
recyclers with the information they need to get started. In some countries, Kodak has
established national contracts with recycling firms. Call your local sales
representative for more information about these contracts.

Kodak and DryView are trademarks of Eastman Kodak Company.

7-6 8186546 1999 June Rev. A


Kodak DryView 8600 Laser Imaging System / for Mammography
– Operator Training Guidelines
The field engineer will cover the following information with the operator upon completion of the
hardware installation: (All references are to the User Guide.)
Product Overview (Section 1)
Identify system capabilities and special features:
 A. Time for first print and subsequent prints (1-1)
 B. Acquisition from a host modality (via a network) (1-1)
 C. Describe the simple film path. (1-2)
 D. Automatic Image Quality Control (1-3)
Controls and Indicators (Section 2)
 Demonstrate how to power on the unit. (2-1)
 Explain that the Remote Keypad is an optional component.
Local Panel:
 A. Identify the controls. (2-2)
 B. Explain that B Setup is not currently used.
A Setup:
 A. Demonstrate that as menus are displayed, the top line states the condition, and the
second line states the action for change.
 B. Advise that changes to the Density, Contrast, Print Contrast Samples and
Sharp/Smooth parameters under A Setup will have no effect on the printed images.
(These four parameters are set by the modality or at the PACs Link 9410 System.)
 C. Advise that the menus for Number of Copies, Autoprint, Film Layout, Keypad Format
and Audible Alerts apply to the optional keypad only. (Also, Exposure Index is for
future use.)
 D. Demonstrate that a film calibration can be performed from A Setup.
Operation (Section 3)
 A. Explain what happens during the power on sequence. (3-1)
 B. Demonstrate loading the film tray, and have an operator perform the procedure. (3-8)
Advise the operator that film is packed with 101 sheets, and the last sheet is used as
a barrier sheet and is nof fed.
 C. Demonstrate how to clean the film tray with an alcohol soaked pad such as TexPad
TX801. (3-8) Leave a few of the pads with the customer and advise that TexPads or a
similar type of cleaning pad should be ordered.
Quality Control Procedures (Section 4)
 A. Demonstrate how to run a QC Baseline Test. (4-1)
 B. Show the operator how to run a Daily QC Test. (4-5)

1
Troubleshooting (Section 5)
Demonstrate how to:
 A. Interpret status and error (display) codes. (5-1)
 B. Open laser to clear jams, using film saver to remove film tray part way in order to
open top cover. (5-8)
 C. Look for possible jammed film in film tray, exposure, developer and exit areas. (5-9)
 D. Perform System Tests using the Test button and arrowing down past the QC Step
Wedge Menu. (5-13)
Placing a service call: (5-20)
 A. Model and serial number identification
 B. Working with the Customer Care Center. (They will try to assist user over the phone.)
Technical Information (Section 7)
 No chemicals and no special venting required. (7-1)
 A. Describe storage of undeveloped film: (7-4)
1. 41°F/5°C to 77°F/25°C
2. Protected from radiation and chemistry fumes (wet processor)
 B. Describe handling of developed film : (7-4)
1. Spills, humidity, and moisture have no significant effect.
2. Leaving films in vehicles in hot climates for extended periods is not
recommended.
3. Store film in sleeves when not being reviewed.
4. Light box viewing:
a. If light box is exceptionally hot, remove film prior to 8 hours.
b. Hot light viewing should be performed with a “cool” hot light and viewing time
should be minimal.
5. Small density increase:
a. Uniform across film
b. Permanent upon full exposure of the film under normal handling conditions
 Describe archivability of developed film. (7-5) – 100 years when stored at recommended
storage conditions.
Film Recycling: (7-6)
 A. Not hazardous according to EPA standards
 B. No special disposal procedures
 C. Silver and polyester may be recovered
I feel that the field engineer has covered all relevant information relating to the DryView 8600
Laser Imager.
DATE
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
FIELD ENGINEER SIGNATURE

2
7 X 9 inside cover

Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imaging System /


for Mammography

User Guide

8229338
6E7379
9/02 Rev. C
Classification, Warnings, and Cautions

Classification, Warnings, and Cautions


for Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager
Read and understand all instructions before using.
Classifications
UL Classified

File Number E163816


Control Number 48VF
Medical Equipment
UL 2601-1 CAN/CSA No. 601.1
!
Classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. With Respect to Electric Shock,
Fire, Casualty and Medical Hazards only in Accordance with UL 2601-1, CAN/CSA
C22.2 No. 601.1 and IEC 601.1.
! WARNING
This equipment is operated with hazardous voltage which can shock,
burn, or cause death.
Remove wall plug before servicing equipment. Never pull on cord to remove from
outlet. Grasp plug and pull to disconnect.
Do not operate equipment with a damaged power cord.
Do not use an extension cord to power this equipment.
Use only the power cord supplied with the equipment.
Position the power cord so it will not be tripped over or pulled.
Connect this equipment to a grounded outlet.
Do not place a portable multiple socket outlet (power strip) on the floor. Mount the
power strip on a wall or on the underside of a table.

! WARNING
Not protected against ingress of liquids, including bodily fluids.

! WARNING
For continued protection against fire, replace fuses only with fuses of the same type
and rating.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 i


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Classification, Warnings, and Cautions


for 8610 Laser Imager (continued)

Avoid touching the developer drum when removing film jams from the imager. The
developer drum may become hot during extended imager operation.

! CAUTION
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. Those limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

! CAUTION
Do not use in the presence of flammable anesthetics, oxygen or nitrous oxide. This
equipment does not have a gas sealed electronics enclosure and could ignite any
flammable or explosive gases present in its environment.

ii 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Classification, Warnings, and Cautions

Classification, Warnings, and Cautions


for 8610 Laser Imager (continued)

! CAUTION
U.S. Federal law restricts sale of this device to or on the order of a licensed health
care practitioner.

! CAUTION
This equipment is intended to connect to other medical devices. Installation and
service maintenance are to be performed only by qualified service personnel. The
Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System, Kodak PACS Link 25 Print Server, or
Kodak PACS Link Medical Image Manager 200 must be installed no closer than
1.83 meters from a patient bed or chair.

! CAUTION

Avoid Laser Beam

This equipment employs an invisible 25 milliwatt laser beam. Laser


radiation may be present when the machine operates without panels or
covers installed.
Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein, may result in eye damage.
Covers shall be removed by authorized service personnel only.
There are no “user” serviceable parts in this machine.

! CAUTION
General External Cleaning: This equipment may be cleaned with a damp cloth
using water with mild detergent, or commercial electronic equipment cleaner.

! CAUTION
Do not substitute or modify any part of this equipment without approval of Eastman
Kodak Company.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 iii


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Classification, Warnings, and Cautions


for 8610 Laser Imager (continued)

! CAUTION
Grounding reliability can only be achieved when this equipment is connected to an
equivalent receptacle marked “Hospital Only” or “Hospital Grade.”

Type B Applied Part

iv 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Safety, EMC, and CE Marking Compliance

Safety, EMC, and CE Marking Compliance

Agency Approvals
This equipment has been tested for and complies with the following Safety and
Emission Standards. Certificates of Compliance and Declarations of Conformity
have been issued for the following areas:

Australia/New Zealand:
AS/NZS 3548:1992
AS 2211-1991
AS3200.1-1990/NZS 6150:1990

Canada:
C108.8-M1983 Class A (Conducted and Emitted EMI/RFI Specs)
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 601.1

Europe:
EN60601-1-2:1993 (EMC)
EN55011 Group 1 Class A (Medical Device Safety)
EN60601-1 (Safety Medical Equipment)
EN60825-1:1993 (Laser Safety)
EN61000-3-2: Harmonics
IEC61000-3-3:1995 Voltage Fluctuations/Flicker
IEC61000-4-2:1995 ESD
IEC61000-4-3:1996 Radiated Radio Frequency
IEC61000-4-4:1995 Fast Transient/Burst
IEC61000-4-5:1995 Surge

Japan:
CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A (Conducted and Emitted EMI/RFI Specs)

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 v


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

USA:
47CFR15B Class A (Conducted and Emitted EMI/RFI Specs)
FDA: 21CFR CH-1. SCH-J. Part 1040 (Performance Standards for Light
Emitting Products)
UL 2601-1 (Medical and Dental Equipment)

ROW:
CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A (Conducted and Emitted EMI/RFI Specs)
IEC61000-4-2:1995 ESD
IEC61000-4-3:1996 Radiated Radio Frequency
IEC61000-4-4:1995 Fast Transient/Burst
IEC61000-4-5:1995 Surge
IEC 60601-1 (Medical Device Safety)
IEC 60601-1-2 (EMC for Medical Devices)
IEC 825-1 (Laser Safety)

CE Marking:
This equipment is part of a medical system and conforms to the medical safety and
EMC in EN60601-1, EN60601-1-1, EN60601-1-2, and the 93/42/EEC, MDD (Medical
Device Directive).
A Technical File and Declaration of Conformity with the Essential Requirements of
the Medical Device Directive have been prepared and signed by the appropriate
personnel and are located at:
Kodak GmbH
Quality Services and Product Safety
70323 Stuttgart Germany
Telephone 49-0711-40-06-5291

vi 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Safety, EMC, and CE Marking Compliance

FCC:
This device complies with the limits for a Class A digital device listed in Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.

Industry Canada:
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement
sur le matérial brouilleur du Canada.

EU:
This equipment complies with the January 1996 EU Community EMC Requirements,
per EN55011 Class A.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 vii


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

BLANK PAGE

viii 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


分類、 警告および注意事項

DryView 8610 レーザー イ メ ージ シ ス テムの


分類、 警告および注意事項
ご使用すべての指示を読み、 理解 し て く だ さ い。
分類
UL によ る分類

フ ァ イル番号 E13816
管理番号 48VF
医療設備
UL 2601-1 CAN/CSA No. 601.1

UL 2601-1、 CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 601.1 およ び IEC 601.1. に限り 、 こ れに合致す


る 感電、 火災、 傷害およ び医療上の危険要素に関し ての保険業者研究所によ る 分類。

本機器は、 感電、 やけ ど、 死の原因 と も な り う る危険 な電圧 で作動 し て


い ま す。
マ シ ンの修理を行 う 前に、 必ず電源プ ラ グ を抜いて く だ さ い。 プ ラ グ を抜 く 際には
コ ー ド を引っ張ら ず、 プ ラ グ本体を持 っ て抜いて く だ さ い。
損傷 し ている電源 コ ー ド で機器を作動 さ せないで く だ さ い。
本機器に電源供給する際、 延長 コ ー ド を使用 し ないで く だ さ い。
本機器付属の電源 コ ー ド 以外は使用 し ないで く だ さ い。
つまずいた り 抜けた り する こ と のないよ う 電源 コ ー ド を配置 し て く だ さ い。
本機器はアースに接続 し て く だ さ い。

体液を含む、 液体に対する保護加工は さ れてお り ません。

火災防止の為、 ヒ ュ ーズ交換の際は必ず同 タ イ プ、 同定格のものを ご使用 く だ さ い。

9/2002 Rev. C 8229338_JP i


DryView 8610 ユーザーガ イ ド

DryView 8610 レーザー イ メ ージ シ ス テムの


分類、 警告および注意事項 (続き)

イ メ ージ シス テムか ら つま っ た フ ィ ルムを取 り 除 く 際には、 現像 ド ラ ムに触ら ない


よ う ご注意 く だ さ い。 長時間イ メ ージ シ ス テム作動 さ せる と 、 現像 ド ラ ムが熱 く
な っ ている恐れがあ り ます。

本機器はテ ス ト の結果、 FCC 条例第 15 部に よ り 、 ク ラ ス A デジ タ ル機器に関する


制限事項に適合 し ている こ と が証明 さ れています。 こ れら の制限事項は住宅向け装
置に対する有害な妨害を防ぐ こ と を目的 と し ています。 本機器は無線周波エネル
ギーを発生、 使用 し てお り 、 こ れを放出する可能性 も あ り ますが、 指示どお り に設
置、 使用 し ない場合には無線通信を妨害する場合も あ り ます。 ただ し 、 特別な設置
状況では妨害が起 こ ら ない と い う 保証 も あ り ません。 本機器がラ ジオやテ レ ビの受
信を妨害 し ているかど う かは、 機器の電源を切っ た り 入れた り すれば確認で き ます。
通信妨害を引き起 こ し ている場合には、 以下の処置を行っ て く だ さ い。
• 受信ア ン テナの向き または位置を変え る。
• 本機器 と 受信機の距離を あける。
• 受信機を 接続し ている コ ン セン ト と は別の回路のコ ン セン ト に本機器を 接続する 。
• 販売担当者またはラ ジオ/テ レ ビに詳 し い技術者に相談する。

可燃性の麻酔剤、 酸素、 亜酸化窒素がある と こ ろ では、 本機器を使用 し ないで く だ


さ い。 本機器には気体を遮断する電子的な密閉装置が付いてお り ませんので、 可燃
性または爆発性のガスがあ る環境では引火の恐れがあ り ます。

ii 8229338_JP 9/2002 Rev. C


分類、 警告および注意事項

DryView 8610 レーザー イ メ ージ シ ス テムの


分類、 警告および注意事項 (続き)

米国連邦法では、 本機器の販売対象を認可を受けた開業医、 または同等の健康管理


業者のみに制限 し ています。

本機器は他の医療機器 と 接続で き ます。 設置およびア フ タ ーサービ スは、 必ず正規


サービ ス担当者が実施 し て く だ さ い。 Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System、
Kodak PACS Link 25 Print Server、および Kodak PACS Link Medical Image Manager
200 は、 患者のベ ッ ド や椅子から 1.8 メ ー ト ル以内には設置 し ないで く だ さ い。

本機器は 25 ミ リ ワ ッ ト の不可視レーザー光線を使用 し ています。 パネルや


カバーを取 り 付けずに本機器を作動 さ せます と 、 レーザー光線が放射する恐
れがあ り ます。
本ガ イ ド に記載 さ れていない調整や操作を行 う と 、 目を傷める恐れがあ り ます。
正規ア フ タ ーサービ ス担当者以外は本体カバーを取 り 外 さ ないで く だ さ い。
本機器はユーザー自身によ っ て修理可能箇所はあ り ません。

本体表面のお手入れ : 本機器のお手入れは、 水で薄めた洗剤または市販の電子機器


用ク リ ーナーを布に含ませて行 っ て く だ さ い。

Eastman Kodak Company から 承認を得る こ と な く 、 本機器のいかな る部分 も取換


え、 または変更 し ないで く だ さ い。

9/2002 Rev. C 8229338_JP iii


DryView 8610 ユーザーガ イ ド

DryView 8610 レーザー イ メ ージ シ ス テムの


分類、 警告および注意事項 (続き)

確実にアースで き る よ う 、 本機器は必ず 「Hospital Only」 または 「Hospital Grade」


の印のあ る対応 コ ン セ ン ト に接続 し て く だ さ い。

* Type B Applied Part

iv 8229338_JP 9/2002 Rev. C


安全規格、 EMC と CE マーキン グへの適合

安全規格、 EMC と CE マーキングへの適合

代理店承認
本機器は、 次の安全規格および排出基準に適合する こ と を検査済みです。 次の地域
を対象に、 適合証明書および適合宣言書が発行 さ れています。

オース ト ラ リ ア/ニ ュ ージー ラ ン ド :


AS / NZS 3548:1992
AS 2211-1991
AS3200.1-1990 / NZS 6150:1990

カ ナダ :
C108.8-M1983 Class A (伝導および放出 EMI / RFI 仕様)
CAN / CSA-C22.2 No. 601.1

ヨ ーロ ッ パ :
EN60601-1-2 : 1993 (EMC)
EN55011 Group 1 Class A (医療機器の安全性)
EN60601-1 (医療設備の安全性)
EN60825-1 : 1993 ( レーザーの安全性 )
EN61000-3-2 : Harmonics
IEC61000-3-3 : 1995 Voltage Fluctuations / Flicker
IEC61000-4-2 : 1995 ESD
IEC61000-4-3 : 1996 Radiated Radio Frequency
IEC61000-4-4 : 1995 Fast Transient / Burst
IEC61000-4-5 : 1995 Surge

日本 :
CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ( 伝導および放出 EMI / RFI 仕様 )

9/2002 Rev. C 8229338_JP v


DryView 8610 ユーザーガ イ ド

アメ リカ :
47CFR15B Class A (伝導および放出 EMI / RFI 仕様)
FDA : 21CFR CH-1. SCH-J. Part 1040 (発光製品の性能基準)
UL 2601-1 (医療および歯科用機器)

ROW :
CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A (伝導および放出 EMI / RFI 仕様)
IEC61000-4-2: 1995 ESD
IEC61000-4-3: 1996 Radiated Radio Frequency
IEC61000-4-4: 1995 Fast Transient / Burst
IEC61000-4-5: 1995 Surge
IEC 60601-1 (医療機器の安全性)
IEC 60601-1-2 (医療機器に関する EMC)
IEC 825-1 (レーザーの安全性)

CE マーキング :
本機器は医療シ ス テムの一部であ り 、 EN60601-1、 EN60601-1-1、 EN60601-1-2 お
よび 93 / 42 / EEC、 MDD (医療機器指令) に定め られた医療上の安全性および
EMC に適合 し ています。
技術フ ァ イル と 、 医療用機器指令の重要要求事項への適合宣言書は正規担当者に よ
り 作成、 署名 さ れ次の場所に保管 さ れています。
Kodak GmbH
Quality Services and Product Safety
70323 Stuttgart Germany
電話 49-0711-40-06-5291

vi 8229338_JP 9/2002 Rev. C


安全規格、 EMC と CE マーキン グへの適合

FCC :
本機器は FCC 条例の第 15 部に挙げ ら れた ク ラ ス A デジ タ ル機器に対する制限事項
に適合 し ています。 操作を行 う 際には、 次の 2 点を遵守する こ と が条件 と な り ます。
(1) 本機器が他に有害な妨害を与えない こ と
(2) 本機器は、 望ま し く ない動作の原因 と な る妨害をは じ め と する、 いかな る妨害を
受けて も問題ない こ と

カ ナダ工業界 :
本ク ラ ス A デジ タ ル機器は、 カ ナダの妨害原因機器規制において定め られた要件を
すべて満た し ています。
本ク ラ ス A デジ タ ル機器はカ ナダの妨害原因機器規制において定め られた要件をす
べて満た し ています。

EU :
本機器は、 1996 年 1 月の EU によ る EMC 要件 EN55011 ク ラ ス A に適合し ています。

9/2002 Rev. C 8229338_JP vii


DryView 8610 ユーザーガ イ ド

空白ページ

viii 8229338_JP 9/2002 Rev. C


Klassifizierung, Warnhinweise und Vorsichtshinweise

Klassifizierung, Warnhinweise und Vorsichtshinweise für


den DryView 8610 Laser Imager

Lesen Sie bitte alle Hinweise vor Inbetriebnahme gründlich durch.

Classification
UL Classified

File number E163816


Control Number 48VF
Medical Equipment
UL 2601–1 CAN/CSA No. 601.1

!
Klassifiziert durch Underwriters Laboratories Inc.® unter Berücksichtigung von Elektroschocks,
Feuer, Unfällen und medizinischen Gefahren nur in Übereinstimmung mit UL 2601–1, CAN/CSA C22.2
Nr. 601.1 und IEC 601.1.

! WARNUNG
Dieses Gerät wird mit Spannungen betrieben, die elektrische Schläge,
Verbrennungen und tödliche Verletzungen verursachen können.
Vor der Wartung ist der Netzstecker zu ziehen. Niemals am Kabel ziehen, wenn Sie den
Stecker aus der Steckdose ziehen.
Das Gerät nicht mit einem beschädigten Netzkabel betreiben.
Beim Einsatz dieses Geräts kein Verlängerungskabel verwenden.
Ausschließlich das diesem Gerät beiliegende Netzkabel verwenden.
Das Netzkabel so verlegen, daß keine Stolpergefahr besteht und es nicht beschädigt wird.
Dieses Gerät darf nur an eine geerdete Steckdose angeschlossen werden.
Keine Mehrfachsteckdose (Steckdosenleiste) auf dem Fußboden verlegen.
Steckdosenleiste nur wandseitig oder unter dem Tisch montieren.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338_DE i


DryView 8610 Benutzerhandbuch

Klassifizierung, Warnhinweise und Vorsichtshinweise für


den DryView 8610 Laser Imager (Fortsetzung)

WARNUNG
!

Das Gerät vor dem Eindringen von Flüssigkeiten schützen.


! WARNUNG
Um kontinuierlichen Brandschutz zu gewährleisten, dürfen nur Sicherungen desselben Typs
und der derselben Nennleistung verwendet werden.

ii 8229338_DE 2002 September Rev. C


Klassifizierung, Warnhinweise und Vorsichtshinweise

Klassifizierung, Warnhinweise und Vorsichtshinweise für


den DryView 8610 Laser Imager (Fortsetzung)

8300-128A

Bei der Auflösung eines Filmstaus die Entwicklerwalze nicht berühren, da sie bei längerem
Betrieb des Imagers heiß werden kann.

! VORSICHT
Dieses Gerät entspricht den Grenzwerten für digitale Geräte der Klasse A gemäß Teil 15 der
FCC-Vorschriften. Diese Werte bieten einen angemessenen Schutz gegen Störungen in
Wohngegenden. Dieses Gerät erzeugt und verwendet Hochfrequenzenergie und kann diese
ausstrahlen. Wenn es nicht in Übereinstimmung mit dem Benutzerhandbuch installiert und
benutzt wird, kann es Störungen des Radioempfangs und an anderen elektronischen Geräten
verursachen. Es besteht jedoch keine Garantie, daß nicht doch vereinzelt Störungen auftreten
können. Sollte dieses Gerät den Radio- oder TV-Empfang stören - dies kann durch Ein- und
Ausschalten des Gerätes festgestellt werden -, so sollte der Benutzer eine der folgenden
Maßnahmen ergreifen:

• Antenne neu ausrichten oder neu positionieren.


• Zwischen Empfänger und Gerät einen größeren Abstand lassen.
• Das Gerät an eine Steckdose anschließen, die nicht mit dem Stromkreis des Empfängers
verbunden ist.
• Fragen Sie den Händler oder einen Radio- und Fernsehtechniker um Rat.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338_DE iii


DryView 8610 Benutzerhandbuch

Klassifizierung, Warnhinweise und Vorsichtshinweise für


den DryView 8610 Laser Imager (Fortsetzung)

! VORSICHT
Nicht in der Nähe entzündlicher Gase wie Anästetika, Sauerstoff oder Stickstoffoxid
verwenden. Das Gehäuse der Elektronik dieses Gerätes ist nicht gasdicht. In der Umgebung
vorhandene entzündliche oder explosive Gase könnten entzündet werden.

! VORSICHT
Laut US-Bundesgesetz ist der Vertrieb dieses Gerätes auf medizinisches Fachpersonal oder
in dessen Auftrag Handelnde beschränkt.

! VORSICHT
Dieses Gerät ist für den Anschluß an andere medizinische Geräte vorgesehen. Installation
und Servicewartung dürfen nur durch speziell ausgebildetes Instandhaltungspersonal
durchgeführt werden. Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System, Kodak PACS Link 25 Print
Server oder Kodak PACS Link Medical Image Manager 200 muß in einer Entfernung von
mindestens 1,8 m vom Bett des Patienten oder vom Behandlungsstuhl aufgestellt werden.

! VORSICHT

Laserstrahlen meiden
In diesem Gerät kommt ein unsichtbarer 25-Milliwatt-Laserstrahl zum Einsatz.
Es kann eine Laserstrahlung vorhanden sein, wenn das Gerät ohne an den
vorgesehenen Stellen angebrachte Abdeckungen betrieben wird.
Die Einstellungen oder die Durchführung von Verfahren, die nicht in dieser Anleitung
beschrieben sind, können zu Augenschäden führen.
Die Abdeckungen des Gerätes dürfen nur von autorisierten
Instandhaltungstechnikern (Service Personal) entfernt werden.
Dieses Gerät enthält keine vom Benutzer zu wartenden Teile.

iv 8229338_DE 2002 September Rev. C


Klassifizierung, Warnhinweise und Vorsichtshinweise

Klassifizierung, Warnhinweise und Vorsichtshinweise für


den DryView 8610 Laser Imager (Fortsetzung)

! VORSICHT
Allgemeines Reinigen der Geräteaußenseite: Dieses Gerät kann mit einem mit Wasser
und einem milden Reinigungsmittel angefeuchteten Tuch oder einem handelsüblichen
Reinigungsmittel für elektronische Geräte gereinigt werden.

! VORSICHT
Ohne die Genehmigung der Eastman Kodak Company dürfen keine Bestandteile des Geräts
ausgewechselt oder modifiziert werden.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338_DE v


DryView 8610 Benutzerhandbuch

Klassifizierung, Warnhinweise und Vorsichtshinweise für


den DryView 8610 Laser Imager (Fortsetzung)

! VORSICHT
Eine zuverlässige Erdung kann nur gewährleistet werden, wenn dieses Gerät an eine für den
Klinikeinsatz entsprechend gekennzeichnete Erdungssteckdose angeschlossen wird.

Type B Applied Part

Teiletyp B

vi 8229338_DE 2002 September Rev. C


Einhaltung der Vorschriften für Sicherheit, EMV und CE-Kennzeichnung

Einhaltung der Vorschriften für Sicherheit, EMV und


CE-Kennzeichnung

Behördliche Zulassungen
Dieses Gerät wurde gemäß folgender Normen für technische Sicherheit und EMV-
Bestimmungen geprüft und genehmigt. Einhaltungs- und Konformitätsbescheinigungen
wurden in den folgenden Ländern erteilt.

Australien/Neuseeland:
AS/NZS 3548:1992
AS 2211–1991
AS3200.1–1990/NZS 6150:1990

Kanada:
C108.8–M1983 Klasse A (Technische Daten für leitungsgebundene und abgestrahlte
elektromagnetische Störungen)
CAN/CSA–C22.2 Nr. 601.1

Europa:
EN60601–1-2 (EMV)
EN55011 Gruppe 1 Klasse A (EMU für Medizinische Geräte)
EN60601–1 (Sicherheitsrichtlinien für Medizinische Geräte)
EN60825-1:1993 (Lasersicherheit)
EN61000–3–2: Oberschwingungen
IEC61000–3–3:1995 Spannungsschwankungen/kurzzeitige Spannungsgwechsel
IEC61000–4–2:1995 ESD
IEC61000–4–3:1996 Abgestrahlte hochfrequente Störungen
IEC61000–4–4:1995 Schnelle Übergänge/kurzzeitige Spannungsspitzen
IEC61000–4–5:1995 Stoßspannungen

2002 September Rev. C 8229338_DE vii


DryView 8610 Benutzerhandbuch

Japan:
CISPR Gruppe 1 Klasse A

USA:
47CFR15B Klasse A (Technische Daten für leitungsgebundene und abgestrahlte
elektromagnetische Störungen)
FDA: 21CFR CH–1. SCH–J. Teil 1040 (Leistungsstandards für lichtaussendende
Produkte)
UL 2601–1 (Medizinische und zahnmedizinsche Geräte)
Andere Länder:
CISPR 11, Gruppe 1, Klasse A (Technische Daten für leitungsgebundene und
abgestrahlte elektromagnetische Störungen)
IEC61000–4–2:1995 ESD
IEC61000–4–3:1996 Abges trahlte hochfrequente Störungen
IEC61000–4–4:1995 Schnelle Übergänge/kurzzeitige Spannungsspitzen
IEC61000–4–5:1995 Stoßspannungen
IEC 60601-1 (Sicherheit für medizinische Geräte)
IEC 60601-1-2 (Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit für medizinische Geräte)
IEC 825-1 (Lasersicherheit)
CE-Kennzeichnung:
Dieses Gerät ist Teil eines medizinischen Systems, das gemäß den Normen EN60601-1,
EN60601-1-1, EN60601-1-2 und 93/42/EEC DMG (Direktive für medizinische Geräte) den
Bestimmungen der medizinischen Sicherheit und elektromagnetischen Verträglichkeit
entspricht.
Ein technisches Heft und eine Konformitätserklärung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen
der Direktive für medizinische Geräte wurden von dem verantwortlichen Personal vorbereitet
und unterschrieben und befinden sich bei:
Kodak GmbH
Qualität und Produktsicherheit
70323 Stuttgart Deutschland
Telefon 49–0711–406–2993
viii 8229338_DE 2002 September Rev. C
Einhaltung der Vorschriften für Sicherheit, EMV und CE-Kennzeichnung

FCC:
Dieses Gerät entspricht den Grenzwerten eines digitalen Gerätes der Klasse A, wie
aufgelistet in Teil 15 der FCC-Vorschriften. Beim Betrieb müssen die beiden folgenden
Bedingungen beachtet werden:
(1) Dieses Gerät darf keine schädigenden Störstrahlungen verursachen, und
(2) Dieses Gerät muß eventuell auftretende Störstrahlungen aushalten, einschließlich
Störstrahlungen, die unkontrollierten Betrieb verursachen.

Kanadische Industrie:
Die Klasse A digital Instrumente entsprechen allen Vorschriften der Kanadischen
Interferenze verursachenden Material Regulationen.

EU:
Dieses Gerät entspricht den Bestimmungen der EU zur elektromagnetischen Verträglichkeit
gemäß EN55011, Klasse A, vom Januar 1996.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338_DE ix


DryView 8610 Benutzerhandbuch

Leerseite

x 8229338_DE 2002 September Rev. C


Clasificación, advertencias y notas de precaución

Clasificación, advertencias y notas de precaución para el


Procesador de imágenes láser Kodak 8610

Lea detenidamente todas las indicaciones antes de utilizar el


equipo.
Clasificación
Clasificado UL

Nº de registro E163816
Nº de control 48VF
Equipo Médico
UL 2601–1 CAN/CSA No. 601.1
!
Clasificado por el Underwriters Laboratories Inc.® (UL) bajo consideración de la electrocución, el
fuego, los accidentes y los riesgos médicos, únicamente en concordancia con UL 2601–1, CAN/CSA
C22.2 Nº 601.1 & IEC 601.1.

! ADVERTENCIA

Este aparato opera con tensiones que pueden causar choques eléctricos,
quemaduras y lesiones mortales.
Antes del mantenimiento se debe desenchufar el aparato de la red. Nunca tire del cable para
retirar el enchufe. Tire directamente del enchufe para desconectarlo.
No utilice el aparato con un cable de red dañado.
No utilice ningún cable de prolongación con este aparato.
Utilice únicamente el cable de corriente suministrado con el aparato.
Tienda el cable de red de manera que no haya riesgo de tropezar con el mismo y que no
pueda ser dañado.
Este aparato solo puede ser conectado a una toma de corriente puesta a tierra.
No coloque un portaenchufes múltiple (regleta de energía) en el suelo. Monte la regleta en la
pared o debajo de una mesa.

Septiembre de 2002 Rev. C 8229338_ES i


DryView 8610 Manual del usuario

Clasificación, advertencias y notas de precaución para el


Procesador de imágenes láser Kodak 8610

! ADVERTENCIA

No está protegido contra el ingreso de líquidos, incluyendo líquidos corporales.


! ADVERTENCIA

Para asegurar la protección permanente contra incendios, sólo se debe utilizar fusibles del
mismo tipo y de la misma resistencia nominal.

8300-128A

No tocar el tambor de revelado al retirar una película atascada, ya que se puede calentar con
la operación prolongada del precesador.
! PRECAUCIÓN

Este aparato cumple con los valores límite para aparatos digitales de la Clase A según la
Parte 15 de las Directrices FCC. Estos valores ofrecen una protección adecuada contra las
interferencias en zonas residenciales. Este aparato genera y utiliza energía de alta
frecuencia y puede irradiar ésta última. Debe ser instalado y utilizado observando el manual
de instrucciones, para no causar interferencias en la recepción de radio y en otros aparatos
electrónicos. No obstante, no hay garantía de que no pudieran producirse interferencias
ocasionales. Si este aparato causara interferencias en la recepción de radio o televisión – lo
cual se puede determinar encendiéndolo y apagándolo – el usuario deberá tomar una de las
medidas siguientes:
• Modificar la orientación o la posición de la antena.
• Aumentar la distancia de separación entre el receptor y el aparato.
• Conectar el aparato a una toma de corriente perteneciente a un circuito diferente al
utilizado por el receptor.
• Solicitar consejos al comerciante o a un técnico de radio/televis ión.

ii 8229338_ES Septiembre de 2002 Rev. C


Clasificación, advertencias y notas de precaución

Clasificación, advertencias y notas de precaución para el


Procesador de imágenes láser Kodak 8610 (continuación)

! PRECAUCIÓN

No utilizar el aparato cerca de gases inflamables como anestésicos, oxígeno u óxido de


nitrógeno. La caja que contiene la electrónica del aparato no sella herméticamente, por lo que
podría encender cualquier gas inflamable o explosivo presente en el entorno.

! PRECAUCIÓN

La ley federal de EE.UU. sólo permite la venta de este aparato a (o por encargo de) un
profesional de la salud con licencia.

! PRECAUCIÓN

Este aparato está diseñado para ser conectado a otros aparatos médicos. La instalación y el
mantenimiento sólo pueden ser realizados por personal de mantenimiento especialmente
cualificado. El Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System, Kodak PACS Link 25 Print Server
o Kodak PACS Link Medical Image Manager 200 debe ser colocado a una distancia mínima
de 1,8 m de la cama o la silla de tratamiento del paciente.

! PRECAUCIÓN

Evite los rayos láser


Este aparato utiliza un rayo láser invisible de 25 milivatios. Puede haber una
presencia de radiación láser si se utiliza el aparato sin las cubiertas colocadas
en los sitios previstos.
El uso de controles o ajustes o la realización de procedimientos, que no están descritos en
este manual, pueden causar lesiones en los ojos.
Las cubiertas del aparato sólo pueden ser retiradas por técnicos de
mantenimiento autorizados (Personal del Servicio Técnico).
Este aparato no contiene ninguna pieza cuyo mantenimiento pueda ser realizado por el
usuario.

! PRECAUCIÓN

Limpieza general del exterior del aparato: Este aparato se puede limpiar con un trapo
humedecido con un detergente suave, o con un producto habitual de limpieza para equipos
electrónicos.

! PRECAUCIÓN

No se pueden cambiar o modificar componentes del aparato sin el consentimiento de


Eastman Kodak Company.
Septiembre de 2002 Rev. C 8229338_ES iii
DryView 8610 Manual del usuario

Clasificación, advertencias y notas de precaución para el


Procesador de imágenes láser Kodak 8610 (continuación)

! PRECAUCIÓN

Sólo se puede garantizar que haya una conexión a tierra segura cuando el aparato se
conecta a una caja de enchufe para puesta a tierra con la indicación correspondiente para el
uso en clínicas.

Type B Applied Part

Piezas Tipo B

iv 8229338_ES Septiembre de 2002 Rev. C


Cumplimiento de las directrices de seguridad, CEM y marcado CE de conformidad

Cumplimiento de las directrices de seguridad, CEM y


marcado CE de conformidad

Homologaciones
Este aparato ha sido comprobado y aprobado según las siguientes normas de seguridad
técnica y prescripciones de compatibilidad electromagnética. Los países siguientes han
otorgado certificaciones de cumplimiento y conformidad.

Australia / Nueva Zelanda:


AS/NZS 3548:1992
AS 2211–1991
AS3200.1–1990/NZS 6150:1990
Canadá:
C108.8–M1983 Clase A (Datos técnicos de interferencias electromagnéticas guiadas o
irradiadas)
CAN/CSA–C22.2 Nº 601.1
Europa:
EN60601-1-2:1993 (CEM)
EN55011 Grupo 1 Clase A (UEM para aparatos médicos)
EN60601–1 (Directrices de seguridad para aparatos médicos)
EN60825-1:1993 (Seguridad láser)
EN61000–3–2: Oscilación armónica
IEC61000–3–3:1995 Variaciones de tensión / cambios temporales de tensión
IEC61000–4–2:1995 ESD
IEC61000–4–3:1996 Interferencias radiadas de alta frecuencia
IEC61000–4–4:1995 Transiciones rápidas/picos temporales de tensión
IEC61000–4–5:1995 Sobretensiones
Japón:
CISPR 11 Grupo 1 Clase A (Datos técnicos de interferencias electromagnéticas guiadas
o irradiadas)

Septiembre de 2002 Rev. C 8229338_ES v


DryView 8610 Manual del usuario

EE.UU.:
47CFR15B Clase A (Datos técnicos de interferencias electromagnéticas guiadas o
irradiadas)
FDA: 21CFR CH–1. SCH–J. Parte 1040 (Normas de potencia para productos con
radiación de luz)
UL 2601–1 (Aparatos médicos y de odontología)

Otros países:
CISPR 11, Grupo 1, Clase A (Datos técnicos de interferencias electromagnéticas
guiadas o irradiadas)
IEC61000–4–2:1995 ESD
IEC61000–4–3:1996 Interferencias radiadas de alta frecuencia
IEC61000–4–4:1995 Transiciones rápidas/picos temporales de tensión
IEC61000–4–5:1995 Sobretensiones
IEC 60601-1 (Seguridad de aparatos médicos)
IEC 60601-1-2 (Compatibilidad electromagnética de aparatos médicos)
IEC 825-1 (Seguridad láser)

Marcado CE de conformidad:
Este aparato forma parte de un sistema médico que cumple con las directrices de seguridad
médica y de compatibilidad electromagnética según las normas EN60601-1, EN60601-1-1,
EN60601-1-2 y 93/42/CEE DAP (Directriz para aparatos médicos).
El personal responsable preparó y firmó un cuaderno técnico y una declaración de
conformidad con los requisitos básicos de la directriz para aparatos médicos, que se
encuentra en:
Kodak GmbH
Calidad y Seguridad de Productos
70323 Stuttgart Alemania
Teléfono 49–0711–406–2993

vi 8229338_ES Septiembre de 2002 Rev. C


Cumplimiento de las directrices de seguridad, CEM y marcado CE de conformidad

FCC:
Este aparato cumple con los valores límite para aparatos digitales de la Clase A listados en
la parte 15 de las directrices FCC. Para su operación se deben observar las dos condiciones
siguientes:
(1) El aparato no debe causar interferencias dañinas, y
(2) El aparato debe poder resistir posibles interferencias, incluyendo las interferencias que
causan una operación descontrolada.

Industria del Canadá:


Este aparato digital Clase A satisface todos los requisitos de las Regulaciones Canadienses
en cuanto a Equipos que causan Interferencias.

EU:
Este aparato cumple con las directrices EMC de la Comunidad EU según EN55011, Clase A,
de enero de 1996.

Septiembre de 2002 Rev. C 8229338_ES vii


DryView 8610 Manual del usuario

PÁGINA EN BLANCO

viii 8229338_ES Septiembre de 2002 Rev. C


Classification, avertissements et précautions d'emploi

Homologation, avertissements et précautions d’emploi


relatifs à l’imageur laser DryView 8610

Lire attentivement toutes les instructions avant d’utiliser cet


appareil.
Classifications
UL Classified

File Number E163816


Control Number 48VF
Medical Equipment
UL 2601–1 CAN/CSA No. 601.1
!
Homologué par Underwriters Laboratories Inc. relativement aux risques de choc
électrique, d’accidents et de blessures corporelles conformément aux articles UL 2601–1,
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 601.1 et IEC 601.1.

AVERTISSEMENT
!

Cet appareil est alimenté par un courant sous tension pouvant entraîner des
chocs électriques, des brûlures ou des blessures mortelles.
Débrancher l’appareil avant tout travail de maintenance. Ne jamais tirer sur le cordon
pour retirer la fiche de la prise.
Ne pas utiliser l’appareil avec un câble électrique endommagé.
Ne pas utiliser de rallonge lors de la mise en service de l’appareil.
Utiliser uniquement le câble électrique fourni avec cet appareil.
Placer le cordon d’alimentation de telle sorte qu’il n’y ait pas de risque de trébucher et qu’il ne
soit pas endommagé.
Cet appareil ne doit être relié qu’à une prise de terre.
N’utilisez pas une rallonge multi-prise (barrette d’alimentation) placée sur le plancher.
Montez la barrette sur le mur ou au-dessous de la table.

Septembre 2002 Rév. C 8229338_FR i


Guide de l’utilisateur de l’Imageur laser DryView 8610

Homologation, avertissements et précautions d’emploi


relatifs à l’Imageur laser DryView 8610 (suite)

AVERTISSEMENT
!

Eviter de mettre l’appareil au contact de substances liquides.


AVERTISSEMENT
!

N’utiliser que des fusibles de même genre et de même puissance nominale afin d’éviter tout
risque d’incendie.

8300-128A

Eviter de toucher le rouleau de développement lorsqu’un film se coince dans l’imageur. Lors
d’une utilisation prolongée de l’appareil, le rouleau peut en effet devenir brûlant.

! ATTENTION
Cet appareil correspond aux normes concernant les appareils numériques de la classe A
conformément à la partie 15 des réglementations FCC. Ces normes garantissent une
protection appropriée contre les interférences dans les installations domestiques. Cet
appareil produit et utilise des radiofréquences et peut également en émettre. S’il n’est pas
installé et utilisé en suivant les indications données dans le manuel d’installation, il peut
provoquer des interférences de réception radiophonique et d’autres appareils électroniques.
Cependant, rien ne peut garantir que des interférences apparaissent dans certaines
installations. Si cet équipement provoque effectivement des interférences perturbant la
réception radio ou télévisée, ce qui peut être déterminé en mettant l’appareil hors puis sous
tension, l’utilisateur peut alors prendre l’une des mesures suivantes :

ii 8229338_FR Septembre 2002 Rév. C


Classification, avertissements et précautions d'emploi

Homologation, avertissements et précautions d’emploi


relatifs à l’Imageur laser DryView 8610 (suite)

• Réorienter l’antenne ou la changer d’emplacement.


• Augmenter la distance entre le récepteur et l’appareil.
• Brancher l’appareil sur une autre prise, dont le circuit n’est pas directement lié à celui sur
lequel le récepteur est branché.
• Demander conseil à votre revendeur ou à un réparateur radio/télévision

! ATTENTION
Ne pas utiliser en présence d’anestésiants inflammables, d’oxygène ou d’oxyde nitreux. Cet appareil
n’est pas équipé d’un boîtier pour pièces électroniques hermétique au gaz et peut enflammer n’importe
quel gaz explosif ou inflammable présent dans son environnement.

! ATTENTION
Cet appareil est prévu pour être raccordé à d’autres équipements médicaux. L’installation et
les opérations de maintenance ne doivent être effectuées que par un personnel spécialisé. Le
système d’acquisition Kodak PACS Links 9410, le serveur d'impression Kodak PACS Link 25
ou le logiciel Kodak PACS Link Medical Image Manager 200 doivent être placés à une
distance d’au moins 1,8 m du lit ou du fauteuil du patient.

! ATTENTION

Eviter de regarder le rayon laser

Cette machine utilise un faisceau laser invisible de 25 milliwatts. Un


rayonnement laser peut être provoqué lorsque l’appareil est utilisé sans les
panneaux disposés aux emplacements prévus.
L’utilisation de commandes ou l’exécution de procédures qui ne figurent pas dans ce guide,
peuvent provoquer des lésions oculaires.

Septembre 2002 Rév. C 8229338_FR iii


Guide de l’utilisateur de l’Imageur laser DryView 8610

Homologation, avertissements et précautions d’emploi


relatifs à l’Imageur laser DryView 8610 (suite)

Les panneaux de l’appareil ne peuvent être retirés que par des techniciens de
maintenance autorisés (personnel de service).
La machine ne contient aucune pièce que l’utilisateur puisse entretenir lui-même.

! ATTENTION
Entretien général externe de l’appareil : cette machine peut être nettoyée à l’aide d’un
chiffon imbibé d’eau et d’un produit d’entretien doux ou d’un produit courant spécialement
utilisé pour les équipements électroniques.

! ATTENTION
Ne pas changer ou modifier des pièces de cet appareil sans l’autorisation de Eastman Kodak
Company.

iv 8229338_FR Septembre 2002 Rév. C


Classification, avertissements et précautions d'emploi

Homologation, avertissements et précautions d’emploi


relatifs à l’Imageur laser DryView 8610 (suite)

! ATTENTION
Une mise à la terre fiable ne peut être garantie que lorsque cet appareil est relié à une prise
de terre spécifique pour l’utilisation en clinique.

Type B Applied Part

type de pièce B

Septembre 2002 Rév. C 8229338_FR v


Guide de l’utilisateur de l’Imageur laser DryView 8610

Conformité aux normes de sécurité, CEM et marquage CE

Autorisations officielles
Cet appareil a été testé et déclaré conforme aux normes de sécurité technique et de
conformité CEM qui suivent. Des attestations de conformité ont été obtenues dans les pays
suivants.

Australie/Nouvelle-Zélande :
AS/NZS 3548:1992
AS 2211–1991
AS3200.1–1990/NZS 6150:1990

Canada :
C108.8–M1983 classe A (Spécifications EMI/REI Conduit et Emis)
CAN/CSA–C22.2 #601.1

Europe :
EN60601-1-2:1993 (CEM)
EN55011 groupe 1 classe A (EMU Sécurité des appareils médicaux)
EN60601–1 (directives sur la sécurité pour les équipements médicaux)
EN60825-1:1993 (Protection contre le laser)
EN61000–3–2: Harmoniques
IEC61000–3–3:1995 Variations de tension/Scintillements
IEC61000–4–2:1995 ESD
IEC61000–4–3:1996 Interférences de radiofréquence irradiée
IEC61000–4–4:1995 Transitions rapides/Crêtes brèves de tension
IEC61000–4–5:1995 Surtensions
Japon :
CISPR 11 groupe 1 classe A (Spécifications EMI/REI Conduit et Emis)

vi 8229338_FR Septembre 2002 Rév. C


Conformité aux normes de sécurité, CEM et marquage CE

Etats-Unis :
47CFR15B Classe A (Spécifications EMI/REI Conduit et Emis)
FDA: 21CFR CH–1. SCH–J. Partie 1040 (1040 (Normes de
performance pour les produits photogènes)
UL 2601–1 (Equipement médical et dentaire)

Autres pays :
CISPR 11 Groupe 1 Classe A (Spécifications EMI/REI Conduit et Emis)
IEC61000–4–2:1995 ESD
IEC61000–4–3:1996 Interférences de radiofréquence irradiée
IEC61000–4–4:1995 Transitions rapides/Crêtes brèves de tension
IEC61000–4–5:1995 Surtensions
IEC 60601-1 (sécurité pour équipement médical)
IEC 60601-1-2 (CEM pour appareils médicaux)
IEC 825–1 (Protection contre le laser)

Certification CE :
Cet appareil fait partie d’un système médical conforme aux normes de sécurité médicale et
de compatibilité électromagnétique EN60601-1, EN60601–1–1, EN60601–1–2 et à la directive
relative aux appareils médicaux 93/42/EEC, MDD (Medical Device Directive).

Un cahier technique ainsi qu’une déclaration de conformité regroupant les principales


exigences de la directive relative aux appareils médicaux ont été établis et signés par le
personnel responsable. Ils sont disponibles auprès de :
Kodak GmbH
Quality Services and Product Safety
70323 Stuttgart Allemagne
Téléphone : 49–0711–40–06–5291

Septembre 2002 Rév. C 8229338_FR vii


Guide de l’utilisateur de l’Imageur laser DryView 8610

Commission fédérale des communications des Etats-Unis (FCC):


Cet appareil est conforme aux limites imposées à un appareil numérique de classe A, figurant
dans la partie 15 des réglementations de la FCC. Son utilisation est soumise aux conditions
suivantes:
(1) l’appareil ne doit pas causer d’interférences nuisibles, et
(2) l’appareil doit pouvoir supporter toute interférence pouvant survenir, y compris les
interférences pouvant entraîner un dysfonctionnement.

Industrie Canada:
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A respecte toutes les exigences des réglementations
canadiennes concernant le matériel causant des interférences .

Union Européenne:
Cet appareil est conforme aux exigenc es sur la compatibilité électromagnétique concernant
la norme européenne EN55011, Classe A, de janvier 1996.

viii 8229338_FR Septembre 2002 Rév. C


Classificazione, avvertenze ed informazioni sulla sicurezza

Classificazione, avvertenze ed informazioni sulla sicurezza


per il DryView 8610 Laser Imager

Leggere attentamente le seguenti informazioni prima dell'uso.

Classification
UL Classified

File number E163816


Control Number 48VF
Medical Equipment
UL 2601–1 CAN/CSA No. 601.1

!
Classificato da Underwriters Laboratories Inc.® in materia di scosse elettriche, incendi, fatalità e
pericoli per la salute solo in conformità alle direttive UL 2601–1, CAN/CSA C22.2 N. 601.1 ed IEC 601.1.

! AVVERTENZA

Il presente apparecchio funziona ad una tensione pericolosa che può


provocare folgorazioni, bruciature o causare la morte.
Staccare la spina prima di effettuare qualsiasi operazione di manutenzione. Non tirare mai il
cavo per staccare la spina.
Non usare l'apparecchio con un cavo elettrico danneggiato.
Non usare una prolunga con questo apparecchio.
Usare esclusivamente il cavo elettrico fornito insieme all'apparecchio.
Posare il cavo elettrico in modo che nessuno vi possa inciampare e che non possa essere
danneggiato.
Il presente apparecchio va collegato unicamente ad una presa messa a terra.
Non posare una presa multipla (cavo elettrico) sul pavimento. Fissare il cavo elettrico ad un
muro oppure sotto un tavolo.

Settembre 2002 Rev. C 8229338_IT i


Manuale utente per il DryView 8610

Classificazione, avvertenze ed informazioni sulla sicurezza


per il DryView 8610 Laser Imager (continua)

! AVVERTENZA

Proteggere l'apparecchio contro la penetrazione di liquidi.


! AVVERTENZA

Usare esclusivamente fusibili di tipo e taratura identici per garantire la protezione antincendio
ininterrotta.

8300-128A

Non toccare il rullo sviluppatore quando si rimuove la pellicola inceppata, poiché il rullo si
surriscalda durante un funzionamento prolungato.

! ATTENZIONE

Dai test effettuati è risultato che l'apparecchio corrisponde ai limiti previsti per apparecchi
digitali di classe A secondo la parte 15 della normativa FCC. Questi limiti permettono una
protezione contro interferenze dannose se l'apparecchio viene usato in ambienti residenziali.
Il presente apparecchio genera, usa e può emettere energia a frequenza radio. In caso non
venisse installato ed usato secondo le istruzioni potranno verificarsi interferenze con
comunicazioni radio e con altri apparecchi elettronici. Non viene pertanto garantito che non si
verifichino interferenze in un particolare ambiente di installazione. Se l'apparecchiatura causa
interferenze dannose alla ricezione radio e televisiva, il che potrà essere determinato
spegnendo e riaccendendolo, si potrà cercare di correggere l'interferenza intraprendendo una
delle seguenti azioni:
• Riorientare o riposizionare l'antenna.
• Aumentare la distanza tra l'apparecchio ed il ricevitore.
• Collegare l'apparecchio ad una presa appartenente ad un circuito diverso da quello usato
per il ricevitore.
• Consultare il rivenditore o un radiotecnico e riparatore TV.

ii 8229338_IT Settembre 2002 Rev. C


Classificazione, avvertenze ed informazioni sulla sicurezza

Classificazione, avvertenze ed informazioni sulla sicurezza


per il DryView 8610 Laser Imager (continua)

! ATTENZIONE

Non usare l'apparecchio in presenza di gas infiammabili, come ad esempio anestetici,


ossigeno o ossido nitroso, poiché gli elementi elettronici non dispongono di un involucro a
tenuta di gas e potrebbero infiammare gas esplosivi o infiammabili presenti nell'ambiente
circostante.

! ATTENZIONE
Questa attrezzatura è stata ideata per essere collegata ad altri dispositivi medicali.
L'installazione e la manutenzione vanno eseguiti esclusivamente da personale di servizio
qualificato ed appositamente istruito. Il sistema d'acquisizione Kodak PACS Link 9410, il
server di stampa Kodak PACS Link 25 o Kodak PACS Link Medical Image Manager 200 devono
essere installati ad una distanza minima di 1,8 m dal letto o dalla poltrona del paziente.

! ATTENZIONE

Evitare il raggio laser


Questo apparecchio impiega un raggio laser invisibile di 25 milliwatt. La
radiazione laser può essere presente se l'apparecchio viene usato senza i
pannelli di protezione installati nei punti previsti.
L’uso di comandi o regolazioni, o l’esecuzione di procedure in modo diverso da quanto qui
specificato, possono risultare in danni agli occhi.
Le protezioni vanno rimosse esclusivamente dal personale di assistenza
autorizzato.
Questa macchina non contiene parti riparabili dall'utente.

Settembre 2002 Rev. C 8229338_IT iii


Manuale utente per il DryView 8610

Classificazione, avvertenze ed informazioni sulla sicurezza


per il DryView 8610 Laser Imager (continua)

! ATTENZIONE

Pulizia generale esterna: questa attrezzatura può essere pulita con un panno umido
utilizzando una soluzione di acqua ed un detersivo neutro, oppure un detergente per
attrezzature elettroniche che si trova in commercio.

! ATTENZIONE

Non sostituire o modificare parti della presente apparecchiatura senza autorizzazione della
Eastman Kodak Company.

iv 8229338_IT Settembre 2002 Rev. C


Classificazione, avvertenze ed informazioni sulla sicurezza

Classificazione, avvertenze ed informazioni sulla sicurezza


per il DryView 8610 Laser Imager (continua)

! ATTENZIONE

Una messa a terra affidabile può essere garantita soltanto se l'apparecchio viene collegato ad
una presa di messa a terra per l'impiego in ospedale che sia contrassegnata come tale.

Type B Applied Part

parte di tipo B

Settembre 2002 Rev. C 8229338_IT v


Manuale utente per il DryView 8610

Norme riguardanti la sicurezza, compatibilità


elettromagnetica e marcatura CE

Conformità
Dai test effettuati è risultato che l'apparecchio è conforme alle seguenti norme di sicurezza e
di compatibilità elettromagnetica (EMC). I certificati e le dichiarazioni di conformità sono stati
rilasciati nei seguenti paesi.

Australia/Nuova Zelanda:
AS/NZS 3548:1992
AS 2211–1991
AS3200.1–1990/NZS 6150:1990

Canada:
C108.8–M1983 Classe A (Specifiche per interferenze a RF/elettromagnetiche condotte e
radiate)
CAN/CSA–C22.2 N. 601.1

Europa:
EN60601–1-2:1993 (EMC)
EN55011 Gruppo 1 Classe A (Compatibilità elettromagnetica per apparecchiature
medicali)
EN60601–1 (Norme di sicurezza per apparecchiature medicali)
EN60825-1:1993 (Sicurezza laser)
EN61000–3–2: Emissioni armoniche di rete
IEC61000–3–3:1995 Fluttuazioni di voltaggio/flicker
IEC61000–4–2:1995 ESD
IEC61000–4–3:1996 Suscettibilità radiata a RF
IEC61000–4–4:1995 Transitori/treni elettrici veloci
IEC61000–4–5:1995 Impulsi di tensione

vi 8229338_IT Settembre 2002 Rev. C


Norme riguardanti la sicurezza, compatibilità elettromagnetica e marcatura CE

Giappone:
CISPR Gruppo 1 Classe A (Specifiche per interferenze a RF/elettromagnetiche condotte
e radiate)

USA:
47CFR15B Classe A (Specifiche per interferenze a RF/elettromagnetiche condotte e
radiate)
FDA: 21CFR CH–1. SCH–J. Parte 1040 (Standard per prodotti ad emissione di luce)
UL 2601–1 (Apparecchiature medicali ed odontoiatriche)

In altri paesi:
CISPR 11, Gruppo 1, Classe A (Specifiche per interferenze a RF/elettromagnetiche
condotte e radiate)
IEC61000–4–2:1995 ESD
IEC61000–4–3:1996 Suscettibilità radiata a RF
IEC61000–4–4:1995 Transitori/treni elettrici veloci
IEC61000–4–5:1995 Impulsi di tensione
IEC 60601-1 (Sicurezza per apparecchiature medicali)
IEC 60601-1-2 (Compatibilità elettromagnetica per apparecchiature medicali)
IEC 825-1 (Sicurezza laser)

Marcatura CE:
Questo apparecchio fa parte di un sistema medicale ed è conforme alle norme di sicurezza e
di compatibilità elettromagnetica secondo EN60601-1, EN60601-1-1, EN60601-1-2 e
93/42/CEE MDD (Direttiva riguardante apparecchiature medicali).
Un libretto tecnico ed una dichiarazione di conformità contenenti i requisiti essenziali della
direttiva riguardante apparecchiature medicali sono stati preparati e sottoscritti dal personale
addetto e sono depositati presso:
Kodak GmbH
Qualità e sicurezza prodotto
D-70323 Stuttgart Germania
Telefono +49–711–406–2993

Settembre 2002 Rev. C 8229338_IT vii


Manuale utente per il DryView 8610

FCC:
Questo apparecchio è conforme ai limiti previsti nelle direttive FCC parte 15 per apparecchi
digitali di classe A. Per l'uso dell'apparecchio rispettare quanto segue:
(1) Questo dispositivo non deve causare interferenze dannose, e
(2) Questo dispositivo deve resistere ad interferenze eventualmente ricevute, incluse
interferenze che causano un funzionamento indesiderato.

Industria canadese:
Il presente apparecchio digitale di classe A è conforme a tutte le norme canadesi riguardanti
attrezzature che causano interferenze.

EU:
Questa attrezzatura è conforme alle norme EU riguardanti la compatibilità elettromagnetica
secondo EN55011, classe A, del gennaio 1996.

viii 8229338_IT Settembre 2002 Rev. C


Classificação, Avisos e Cuidados

Classificação, Avisos e Cuidados com o DryView 8610


Laser Imager

Procure ler atentamente e compreender as instruções que se


seguem antes de usar o equipamento.

Classificações
Classificado como UL

Arquivo Número E163816


Número de Controle 48VF
Equipamento Médico
UL 2601–1 CAN/CSA No. 601.1

!
Classificado pela Underwriters Laboratories Inc. no que se refere a choque elétrico, incêndio,
riscos médicos e incidentais somente de acordo com UL 2601–1, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 601.1 e IEC
601.1.

! AVISO
Este equipamento é operado com voltagem perigosa, podendo causar choque,
queimadura ou mesmo morte.
Remova a tomada da parede antes de efetuar o serviço de manutenção no equipamento.
Nunca puxe o cabo de força para removê-lo da tomada. Para desconectar o plugue da
tomada, segure-o e em seguida puxe.
Não coloque o equipamento em funcionamento com o cabo de força danificado.
Não use uma extensão elétrica para ligar o equipamento.
Use somente o cabo força fornecido junto com o equipamento.
Posicione o cabo de força de maneira que ele não obstrua o caminho nem seja puxado.
Ligue este equipamento a uma tomada devidamente aterrada.
Não coloque um suporte portátil de múltiplas tomadas de corrente no solo. Monte o suporte
de corrente na parede ou na parte inferior de uma mesa.

Setembro, 2002 Rev. C 8229338_PB i


Guia do Usuário DryView 8610

Classificação, Avisos e Cuidados com o DryView 8610


Laser Imager (continuação)

! AVISO
Não protegido contra a entrada de líquidos, incluindo fluidos corporais.

! AVISO
Para garantir uma proteção contínua contra riscos de incêndio, substitua os fusíveis
queimados somente por outros do mesmo tipo e da mesma indicação de corrente.

8300-128A

Evite tocar no tambor de revelação quando estiver fazendo a remoção de filmes emperrados
no interior do equipamento. O tambor de revelação pode se aquecer durante um período de
funcionamento prolongado do equipamento.

! CUIDADO
Este equipamento foi testado e constatou-se estar em conformidade com os limites
estabelecidos para um equipamento digital de Classe A, consoante à Parte 15 dos
regulamentos e normas da FCC. Estes limites são estabelecidos para prover uma proteção
razoável contra interferência danosa em uma instalação residencial. Este equipamento gera,
utiliza e pode emitir energia de rádio freqüência e, se não for instalado de acordo com as
instruções, poderá causar interferência danosa às comunicações de rádio. Contudo, não há
garantia de que não ocorrerá interferência em uma dada instalação em particular. Se este
equipamento causar interferência nas recepções de rádio ou de televisão, o que pode ser
verificado ligando-se e desligando-se o aparelho, o usuário é orientado a tentar corrigir esta
interferência por meio de um dos seguintes procedimentos descritos abaixo:

• Reoriente ou reposicione a antena de recepção.


• Aumente a distância que separa o equipamento do aparelho de recepção.

ii 8229338_PB Setembro, 2002 Rev. C


Classificação, Avisos e Cuidados

Classificação, Avisos e Cuidados com o DryView 8610


Laser Imager (continuação)

• Ligue o equipamento a uma tomada de força que esteja em um circuito diferente daquele
no qual se encontra conectado o aparelho de recepção.
• Consulte um representante ou um técnico profissional de rádio/TV para obter ajuda.

! CUIDADO
Não utilize este equipamento na presença de anestésicos inflamáveis, oxigênio e óxido
nitroso. Este equipamento não possui um invólucro eletrônico com vedação contra gases.
Portanto, ele pode causar a ignição de qualquer substância gasosa inflamável ou explosiva
que esteja presente no ambiente.

! CUIDADO
A lei federal dos Estados Unidos restringe a venda deste dispositivo a médicos ou a
profissionais de saúde autorizados.

! CUIDADO
Este equipamento foi projetado para ser conectado a outros aparelhos médicos. A instalação
e manutenção devem ser realizadas por pessoal técnico qualificado. Qualquer dos
equipamentos Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System, Kodak PACS Link 25 Print Server,
e Kodak PACS Link Medical Image Manager 200 deve ser instalado a uma distância igual ou
superior a 1,80m da cama ou da cadeira do paciente.

! CUIDADO

Evite o raio laser

Este equipamento emprega um feixe raio laser invisível de 25 miliwatts de


potência. A radiação laser pode estar presente quando a máquina estiver
funcionando sem que os painéis ou tampas estejam instalados.
O uso de controles ou ajustes, ou a realização de procedimentos que não estejam aqui
especificados, poderá resultar em danos aos olhos.
As tampas devem ser removidas somente por pessoal técnico autorizado.
Esta máquina não contém peças que podem ser substituídas ou reparadas pelo usuário.
Setembro, 2002 Rev. C 8229338_PB iii
Guia do Usuário DryView 8610

Classificação, Avisos e Cuidados com o DryView 8610


Laser Imager (continuação)

! CUIDADO
Limpeza externa geral: A limpeza deste equipamento pode ser feita usando-se um pano
úmido com água e detergente suave, ou um limpador comercial para equipamento
eletrônico.

! CUIDADO
Não substitua nem modifique nenhuma parte deste equipamento sem a aprovação da
Eastman Kodak Company.

iv 8229338_PB Setembro, 2002 Rev. C


Classificação, Avisos e Cuidados

Classificação, Avisos e Cuidados com o DryView 8610


Laser Imager (continuação)

! CUIDADO
Um aterramento elétrico confiável somente poderá ser obtido quando este equipamento
estiver conectado a um receptáculo equivalente marcado como "Somente Hospital" ou
"Categoria Hospitalar".

Type B Applied Part

Parte aplicada do tipo B

Setembro, 2002 Rev. C 8229338_PB v


Guia do Usuário DryView 8610

Segurança, EMC e Compatibilidade Marking CE

Aprovações por Agências Regulamentadoras


Este equipamento foi testado e mostrou estar em conformidade com os Padrões de
Emissão e de Segurança descritos a seguir. Os Certificados de Adequação e as
Declarações de Conformidade foram emitidos pelos países descritos abaixo:

Austrália/Nova Zelândia:
AS/NZS 3548:1992
AS 2211–1991
AS3200.1–1990/NZS 6150:1990

Canadá:
C108.8–M1983 Classe A (Espectros EMI/RFI Conduzidos e Emitidos)
CAN/CSA–C22.2 No. 601.1

Europa:
EN60601-1-2:1993 (EMC)
EN55011 Grupo 1 Classe A (Segurança de Dispositivo Médico)
EN60601–1 (Equipamento Médico de Segurança)
EN60825-1: 1993 (Segurança de Laser)
EN61000–3–2: Harmônicas
IEC61000–3–3:1995 Flutuações de Voltagem/Oscilação
IEC61000–4–2:1995 ESD
IEC61000–4–3:1996 Rádio freqüência irradiada
IEC61000–4–4:1995 Transiente Rápido/Partida
IEC61000–4–5:1995 Pico

Japão:
CISPR 11 Grupo 1 Classe A (Espectros EMI/RFI Conduzidos e Emitidos)
vi 8229338_PB Setembro, 2002 Rev. C
Segurança, EMC e Compatibilidade Marking CE

USA:
47CFR15B Classe A (Espectros EMI/RFI Conduzida e Emitida)
FDA: 21CFR CH–1. SCH–J. Parte 1040 (Padrões de desempenho para produtos de
emissão de luz)
UL 2601–1 (Equipamento Médico e Dentário)

ROW:
CISPR 11 Grupo 1 Classe A (Espectros EMI/RFI Conduzidos e Emitidos)
IEC 61000-4-2: 1995 ESD
IEC 61000-4-3: 1996 Freqüência de radiação
IEC 61000-4-4: 1995 Transiência rápida / explosão
IEC 61000-4-5: 1995 Sobretensão
IEC 60601-1 (Segurança de Dispositivo Médico)
IEC 60601-1-2 (EMC para Dispositivos Médicos)
IEC 825-1 (Segurança de Laser)

CE Marking:
Este dispositivo é parte de um sistema médico e se encontra em conformidade com as
normas de segurança médica e EMC constantes em EN60601-1, EN60601-1-1, EN60601-1-
2 e 93/42/EEC, MDD (Diretiva de Dispositivo Médico).
Um Arquivo Técnico e uma Declaração de Conformidade com os Requisitos Essenciais da
Diretiva de Dispositivo Médico foram preparados e assinados pelo pessoal técnico
apropriado e podem ser localizados na:
Kodak GmbH
Quality Services and Product Safety
70323 Stuttgart Alemanha
Telefone 49–0711–40-06–5291

Setembro, 2002 Rev. C 8229338_PB vii


Guia do Usuário DryView 8610

FCC: (Comissão Federal de Comunicações dos EUA)


Este dispositivo encontra-se em conformidade com os limites estabelecidos para um
equipamento digital de Classe A listado na parte 15 dos Regulamentos e Normas da FCC. O
funcionamento está sujeito a duas condições, descritas abaixo:
(1) Este dispositivo não pode causar interferência danosa, e
(2) Este dispositivo deve aceitar qualquer interferência recebida, inclusive interferência que
possa causar um funcionamento não desejado.

Indústria do Canadá:
Este equipamento digital de Classe A preenche todos os requisitos constantes nos
Regulamentos sobre Aparelhos Causadores de Interferência, do Canadá.

União Européia:
Este equipamento se encontra em conformidade com as Exigências EMC de janeiro de 1996
da Comunidade da União Européia, no que se refere à EN55011 Classe A.

viii 8229338_PB Setembro, 2002 Rev. C


Table of Contents

PLEASE NOTE The information contained herein is based on the experience


and knowledge relating to the subject matter gained by Eastman
Kodak Company prior to publication.
No patent license is granted by this information.
Eastman Kodak Company reserves the right to change this
information without notice and makes no warranty, express or
implied, with respect to this information. Kodak shall not be liable
for any loss or damage, including consequential or special
damages, resulting from the use of this information, even if loss
or damage is caused by Kodak’s negligence or other fault.

Table of Contents
Description Page
Classification, Warnings, and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Safety, EMC, and CE Marking Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Section 1 – Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
The Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imaging System / for
Mammography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
How the 8610 Laser Imager Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Automatic Image Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Systems Connecting to the 8610 Laser Imager . . . . . . . 1-3
Service and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
IMPORTANT NOTICE TO PURCHASER . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Section 2 – Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager Controls – Main . . . 2-1
Local Panel Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
General Setup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Menu Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Menu Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Menu Change Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Parameter Menu Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 ix


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Description Page
Section 3 – Operation .............................. 3-1
System Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Producing a Print from a Host Modality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Loading/Unloading the Film Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Section 4 – Quality Control Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Compliance Guidance – Quality Control for Laser Imagers
Used in Digital Mammography Systems . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Automatic Image Quality Control and the QC Process . 4-1
Running a QC Baseline Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Running a Daily QC Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Section 5 – Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Local Panel Message Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Local Panel Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Clearing Film Jams – General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Inserting the Film Saver and Removing the Film Tray . 5-8
Clearing Jams from the Film Tray Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Clearing Jams from the Exposure Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Clearing Jams from the Developer and Exit Areas . . . . 5-11
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Clearing the Developer or Exit Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
System Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Test Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Menu Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Print QC Step Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Print SMPTE Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Display Software Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Display System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Configuration Menu Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Calling for Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

x 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Table of Contents

Description Page
Section 6 – Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Non-Operating Environment: Shipping and Storage . . . 6-1
Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Control Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Film Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Agency Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Section 7 – Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Spectral Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Image Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Automatic Image Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Less Impact on the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Storage and Handling of Undeveloped Film . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Handling of Developed Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Archivability of Developed Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Exposure to Moisture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Odor Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Heat Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Film Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Operator Training Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 xi


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

BLANK PAGE

xii 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Introduction

Section 1 – Introduction

The Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imaging System / for Mammography


The 8610 Laser Imager / for Mammography is a continuous tone laser imager with
an integrated photothermographic film developer. The imager produces high-quality
monochrome images, using an optical laser scanning system, a data control system
that manages external data flow, and a film developer.
The imager uses 8 by 10-inch (20.3 by 25.4 cm) Mammography Laser Imaging Film.
Each film package contains 100 sheets of film.
The imager produces the first print in approximately 145 seconds, and subsequent
prints at approximately 40 prints per hour. It can produce output from more than one
modality.
The imager acquires, formats and prints images under control of a host modality, to
which it is interfaced via a Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System. The operator
uses a local panel on the imager for control of various local functions. No machine
maintenance is required of the operator.

Figure 1-1. 8610 Laser Imager / for Mammography

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 1-1


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

How the 8610 Laser Imager Works


Each time it receives a print command, the imager prints an image using the
following sequence.

Note
The circled numbers in Figure 1-2 match the sequence steps. Dashed lines
show the film path.

1. Feed film – The feed area drives a sheet of film from the supply tray and feeds it
into the separation rollers.
2. Separate film – The separation rollers check for more than one sheet, then drive
a single sheet of film into the exposure module.
3. Expose film – A laser beam exposes the film. The film is then guided into the
film developer.
4. Develop film – The film develops as it passes over the heated developer drum.
5. Check image quality – The film is routed from the film developer, through the
densitometer, and out to the receive tray.

Figure 1-2. Print Sequence

1-2 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Introduction

Automatic Image Quality Control


The built-in densitometer is a key element in the Automatic Image Quality Control
(AIQC) process. It enables the imager to automatically adjust image processing
parameters to produce the best image. The imager adjusts these parameters each
time it prints a calibration film. A calibration film is printed when:
• The 8610 Laser Imager is powered on.
• The film tray is inserted in the imager.
• A calibration film is requested from the setup menu.
• The imager has not been used for 8 hours, and any type of print is
requested.
• The imager reactivates from Energy Saver mode.

Note
If the Energy Saver mode is activated, the 8610 Laser Imager shuts down its
heaters and motors after 3 hours of inactivity. Any button pressed reactivates
the imager to automatically warm up to operating temperature. Also, the
imager reactivates if it is sent an image. A calibration film prints once the
imager reaches operating temperature.

Systems Connecting to the 8610 Laser Imager


The 8610 Laser Imager is used in full-field digital mammography (and in other digital
applications) to reproduce images received from a digital modality.

! Warning
J1 (input/output) is intended for interconnection to equipment that complies
with the appropriate IEC 601-1/IEC 601-1-1 harmonized national standards
when interconnected.

Service and Installation


U.S. Connection: 120 volts Line to Neutral
Only factory-trained personnel are authorized to install and service the 8610 Laser
Imager. Circuit drawings are made available to the service technician.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 1-3


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

IMPORTANT NOTICE TO PURCHASER


Kodak warrants that the 8610 Laser Imager will be free from defects in parts,
material and manufacture for the period of one (1) year from the date of installation.
For defects occurring during the warranty period and about which Kodak has
received notice during the warranty period, Kodak will provide Buyer with free
replacement parts and labor to replace warranty-covered items.
THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER PRODUCT WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS, AND THOSE ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING OR
USAGE OF TRADE.
The express warranty does not apply to the following: expendable parts; defects or
damage incurred in transportation to the end-user; defects or damage due to
neglect, misuse, operator error, improper installation or alteration of the 8610 Laser
Imager; or operation of the 8610 Laser Imager out of specification.
EXCEPT FOR THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY STATED ABOVE, KODAK IS NOT
LIABLE FOR DIRECT DAMAGES. KODAK WILL NOT IN ANY EVENT BE LIABLE
FOR INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, REGARDLESS
OF THE LEGAL THEORY ASSERTED, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE AND STRICT
LIABILITY.

1-4 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Controls and Indicators

Section 2 – Controls and Indicators

Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager Controls – Main


The imager uses the following controls. The numbered descriptions below
correspond to the numbered callouts in Figure 2-1.
1. Local Panel – Uses a two-line display with 40 characters per line to provide
status, setup, and test information. The panel contains six function buttons and a
numeric keypad. (See page 2-2 for details.)
2. Power Switch – Controls power to the imager.
3. Film Saver – Protects film from exposure when the film tray is temporarily
removed from the 8610.
4. Manual Film Tray Release button – Allows the film tray to be removed without
the 8610 Imager being powered on. Insert the film saver before using this button
or the film will be exposed.

Figure 2-1. 8610 Laser Imager – Controls and Indicators

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 2-1


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Local Panel Controls and Indicators


The numbered descriptions below correspond to the numbered callouts in Figure 2-2.
1. Display – Uses a two-line, alphanumeric display to provide status, setup, and test
information on the 8610 Imager.
S Schedule PM: Displays when the user should place a service call for Imager
preventative maintenance.
S Supply= xx: If enabled, displays the number of films in the film tray.
S Supply=? xx: If enabled, displays the number of films the Imager estimates are left in
the film tray.
2. A and B Setup (buttons) – Select one of the two input modules for parameter setup or
changes. (B Setup is not currently used.)
3. Test (button) – Accesses the test menu.
4. Down and Up Arrows (buttons) – Scroll the display and move the display cursor, when
present.
5. Exit (button) – Allows user to exit any menu or local panel operation.
6. Enter (button) – Accepts entry. Executes commands or advances menu.
7. Numeric Keypad (buttons) – Allows user to enter numeric information.
8. Clear (button) – Clears (deletes) entries.

A: DIGITAL READY SYSTEM READY


B: NONE IDLE SCHEDULE PM SUPPLY= xx

Figure 2-2. Local Panel

2-2 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Controls and Indicators

System Setup
The 8610 Laser Imager provides setup menus that configure and adjust the default
settings (parameters) that control functions such as printing or image density. Default
settings are the values that are loaded when you switch on the imager. (When your
imager is installed, it is set up to work for your environment, so you should rarely
need to access and change the default function settings. They should be changed
only after consultation with the lead interpreting physician and a Kodak
representative.)
Since the 8610 Laser Imager is being used in a DICOM network, the Density,
Contrast, Sharp/Smooth, and Polarity parameters can be controlled by the modality
or the Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System. Changes in the 9410 Acquisition
System are to be performed only by a Kodak service representative.
The general setup menus are accessed in the order shown below. Individual menu
descriptions are listed alphabetically in Table 2-1.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 2-3


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

General Setup Menus

1. Density * 9. Keypad Format **


See page 2-8 See page 2-9

2. Contrast * 10. Audible Alerts **


See page 2-8 See page 2-8

4. Sharp/Smooth * 11. Exposure Index


See page 2-10 See page 2-9
Perform
5. Polarity 12.
Calibration
See page 2-10 See page 2-10

Number of 13. Date/Time


6.
Copies **
See page 2-9 See page 2-8

7. Autoprint ** 14. Gamma Table *


See page 2-8 See page 2-9
1. Format
See page 2-9 8. Film Layout ** 15. Image Size *

2. Mode See page 2-9 See page 2-9

See page 2-9 16. Detector Size *


See page 2-8

* This parameter is not user adjustable.

** Applicable only to imagers with optional Remote Keypad. (Not available with
8610 Laser Imager.)

2-4 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Controls and Indicators

Menu Buttons
Use the following buttons to access and change parameter menus (see Figure 2-3):
1. A Setup (button) or B Setup (button) – Selects an input menu for setup.
(B Setup is not used in DICOM network installations.)
2. Down Arrow (button) – Scrolls to the next parameter menu. From the last
menu, scrolls to the first menu.
3. Up Arrow (button) – Scrolls to the previous parameter menu. From the first
menu, scrolls to the last menu.
4. Enter (button) – After you access a parameter menu, opens an editable display.
When you enter a new value for a parameter, pressing the Enter button enters
the new value for the parameter.
5. Exit (button) – Cancels changes entered in an editable display and restores the
original values or settings. Continued pressing allows quick exit of setup function.
6. Clear (button) – Clears an incorrect entry. If you enter values that are out of
range for a display, an audible signal sounds. To delete the incorrect value, press
the Clear button.

A: DIGITAL READY SYSTEM READY


B: NONE IDLE SCHEDULE PM SUPPLY= xx

Figure 2-3. Menu Buttons

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 2-5


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Menu Format
Parameter menus display information about the menu and the parameter.
The first menu for each parameter:
• Tells you the menu number
• Identifies the parameter
• Lists the current value for the parameter
• Identifies the current input module selected
• Provides information about changing the parameter and continuing to the next
menu.
Subsequent menus tell you:
• What to enter
• The range of possible values for the parameter.
A sample parameter menu is shown in Figure 2-4, followed by the general procedure
used to change a parameter.

Information Menu Current Input


Parameter
Line Number Value Module

= 16

Action Line

Figure 2-4. Parameter Menu Display

2-6 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Controls and Indicators

Menu Change Procedure


To change an individual parameter:
1. Select an input module by pressing either the A Setup or B Setup button.
(B Setup is not currently used.)
2. Access the parameter menu by using the Down or Up Arrow buttons to scroll
through the list.

Note
The location of each parameter menu is shown earlier in this section.

3. When the correct parameter is displayed, press Enter to access the parameter’s
change menus.
You may find that you need to change information in a series of menus.
Each menu display contains an Information line (upper line) and an Action line
(lower line) instruction. (The Action line tells you how to change the parameter
and how to continue.)
4. Use the arrow buttons or the numeric keypad to change the value and then
continue to the next menu as instructed.

Note
If you enter a value that is out of range, the imager beeps. Clear the entry by
pressing the Clear button (see step 5) and re-entering the appropriate value.

5. When you have made changes to a menu, press one of the following buttons to
exit the menu:
• To accept the changes and exit to the previous menu, press Enter.
• To cancel the changes and exit to the previous menu with the original values
displayed, press Exit.
• To delete a change and re-enter values for a parameter, press Clear. (Clear
does not exit from the current menu.)
Each parameter menu is listed in alphabetical order in Table 2-1.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 2-7


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Parameter Menu Table


Table 2-1. Parameter Menus

Parameter Menu Description

Audible Alerts This parameter applies only to imagers with a


keypad. (Not used with the 8610.)

Autoprint This parameter applies only to imagers with a


keypad. (Not used with the 8610.)

Contrast Controls the amount of contrast in an image. Contrast


is the difference between the lighter and darker areas
of an image.
Range: 1 to 12
Use the contrast samples to choose the best value
and enter the number for that value.
(This parameter can be changed only at the modality
or in the Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System.)

Date/Time Changes date and time.


Press Enter to access each part of the date in turn or
the time.
A blinking cursor identifies the current value for each
part of the date or time.
Either use the numeric keypad to enter a new value,
or use the arrow buttons to change the value
displayed (such as the month or the year).

Density Controls the density of the image.


(This parameter can be changed only at the modality
or in the 9410 Acquisition System.)

Detector Size Specifies the size of the pixels in the image to be


printed. This parameter is unused when Image Size
is set to Scale to Fit.
Note: This parameter is not user-adjustable.

2-8 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Controls and Indicators

Parameter Menu Description

Exposure Index This setting is for service only. Do not change.

Film Layout This parameter applies only to imagers with a


keypad. (Not used with the 8610.)

Format Determines the number of images that print on a


single sheet of film.

Gamma Table Specifies which of two sets of gamma tables will be


used to control image brightness and density: (1)
transmittance or (2) linear optical density.

The 8610 creates the two sets of 16 gamma tables


each time it self-calibrates. The gamma tables are
used by the 8610 in conjunction with the current
contrast setting to provide grayscale optimization.

Note: This parameter is not user adjustable.

Image Size Defines the size of the printed image.


Scale to Fit: Image will be magnified or
reduced to fit the image area on the film,
unless the parameter is overridden by the
modality.

Note: This parameter is not user adjustable.

Keypad Format This parameter applies only to imagers with a


keypad. (Not used with the 8610.)

Mode Allows setting printing mode to Landscape or Portrait.

Number of Copies This parameter applies only to imagers with a


keypad. (Not used with the 8610.)

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 2-9


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Parameter Menu Description

Perform Calibration Prints a calibration step wedge using current settings,


then calibrates the densitometer.
Press Enter to start the calibration.
If a problem occurs during calibration, the imager
displays an error message. Refer to Troubleshooting,
Table 5-1, for information on how to deal with the
problem.

Polarity Determines whether image is printed as a positive or


negative.
Selections:
POSITIVE
If the acquired image is positive, prints a
positive image and vice versa.
NEGATIVE
Reverses the acquired print (a positive
acquired image is printed as a negative and
vice versa).

Sharp/Smooth Determines the sharpness or smoothness of the


printed image. Smooths out the jagged edges of the
pixels in an image as specified.
Selections:
Range: 1 to 6 or Auto
1 = Sharpest image
6 = Smoothest image
Auto = The imager determines
the best setting for the size of
the image.
Current setting is marked by an asterisk (*).
(This parameter can be changed only at the modality
or in the 9410 Acquisition System.)

2-10 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Operation

Section 3 – Operation

System Power Up
Set the imager power switch to ON. The following sequence occurs:
1. The imager performs a series of self-diagnostic tests.
2. If the power-on self-test is successful, the machine warms up for about 25
minutes.
3. After warmup, the machine calibrates the densitometer lamp.
4. After calibrating the densitometer lamp, the machine prints a calibration step
wedge.

Note
The system displays a message for each stage of system power up.

Figure 3-1. Power Switch and Local Panel

Producing a Print from a Host Modality


After warmup and calibration, the Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imaging System is
ready to print. Print commands are issued and controlled from the host modality.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 3-1


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Loading/Unloading the Film Tray

Note
Leave the 8610 Laser Imager on while loading or unloading the film tray. If you
remove power from the imager while the system is in use, any previously
acquired images stored in memory will be lost.

1. When 100 sheets of Kodak DryView Mammography Laser Imaging Film have
been used, the tray unlocks automatically, and instructions for tray removal are
displayed on the local panel. (See Figure 3-2.)
2. Swing open the handle of the film tray.
3. Important: Remove the old film insert and any unused “liner” sheet of film from
the tray and dispose of them per local disposal regulations. (The liner sheet
contains a trace of silver.)

Note
Before loading a new package of film, clean the inside surface of the film tray,
including the ramp and top edge of the tray. Use an alcohol soaked pad such
as TexPad TX801. Wait until the alcohol evaporates before proceeding.

4. Press the film package down in the tray as follows: Press the film package to the
left, against the soft guide, with the black plastic bag tail lapping through the
handle, and the label up. Press down firmly using both hands so the film
package sits flat against the bottom of the tray.
5. Swing the handle of the film tray back in place.
6. Remove the tear strip from the black plastic bag.

Note
Important! Do not install the Film Saver onto the film tray.

7. Slide the tray back into the imager slot.


8. To remove the black plastic bag so the imager can access the Mammography
Laser Imaging Film, pull the black plastic bag tail firmly and smoothly. The entire
film bag should slide out.
9. Dispose of the black plastic bag.

10. To continue processing images, press Enter on the local panel.

3-2 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Operation

Figure 3-2. Loading/Unloading Film

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 3-3


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

BLANK PAGE

3-4 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Quality Control Procedures

Section 4 – Quality Control Procedures

Compliance Guidance – Quality Control for Laser Imagers used in


Digital Mammography Systems
These Quality Control Procedures are intended to provide guidance for
mammography facilities and their personnel. They represent the equipment
manufacturer ’s views on the appropriate procedures for conducting Quality Control
tests for digital mammography and observing the Mammography Quality Standards
Act (MQSA). The following procedures represent acceptable ways of doing the tests,
but unlike regulations, they are not binding. Alternate procedures may be used if
they satisfy the requirements of the applicable statute, regulations, or both. It is the
responsibility of the mammography facility to read, understand, and follow the
regulations.
Under its own authority, a state may impose requirements more stringent than those
imposed in the FDA Mammography Quality Standards Act. A facility should check
with state or local authorities regarding their requirements.

Automatic Image Quality Control and the QC Process


The Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager / for Mammography has a built-in Automatic
Image Quality Control (AIQC) system that automatically compensates for film lot
variations, ensuring consistent print densities. The MQSA requires that the
mammography facility establish a quality control (QC) process that verifies the
effectiveness of the AIQC system. Kodak’s recommendations below are based on
the MQSA and the QC process described in the Radiologic Technologist’s Section of
the Mammography Quality Control Manual, W 1999, published by the American
College of Radiology. This QC process has been adapted to apply to the special
features of Kodak DryView Mammography Laser Imaging Film and the
characteristics of the 8610 Laser Imager. The procedures outlined below assume
that the user has been trained in operation of the 8610 Laser Imager.

Running a QC Baseline Test


Per the MQSA, a baseline test must be run when the 8610 is first installed, and must
be repeated every time a box of film with a different emulsion number is used. This
test sets up a baseline set of film parameter values that shall be used as a standard
for comparison in daily quality control tests. Kodak recommends the procedure
described below as a means of complying with this regulation.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 4-1


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Procedure for the Installing Field Engineer – The installing field engineer verifies
that the 8610 meets its performance specifications, runs the baseline test described
below, and prints a clinical image of the site’s choice. The site’s responsible
healthcare professional is asked to approve that the 8610 produces an acceptable
clinical image. If the image is not acceptable, the field engineer repeats his
procedures until the settings for the baseline print produce acceptable clinical
images.
Procedure for the QC Technologist – After an acceptable installation, the user
facility’s technologist must repeat the baseline test whenever a change occurs in film
emulsion lots.

Note
Following is an example of a film lot identifier: 022040-007-C-006. (The film
emulsion number is underlined.)

Baseline Test
1. Apply power to the 8610 and allow it to warm to READY, as indicated on the
local panel. The 8610 will print a film calibration sheet, to put its Automatic Image
Quality Control (AIQC) system in control.
2. Print a QC Step Wedge test film. ( Refer to page 5-15 in this User Guide for the
procedure. See Figure 4-1 on the next page for a sample step wedge,)
3. Repeat printing QC Step Wedge films until you have accumulated five test films.
4. Using a densitometer, read and record the density of each step (1 through 21) on
each of the five test films. (For consistency from film to film, always read density
at the center of each wedge.) The QC Step Wedge is positioned on the film to
allow for the use of an automatic densitometer such as the X-Rite Model 391
Densitometer for automatic density recordings.

Note
You can choose to use a clear area on the test films instead of the actual step
1 to take the “step 1” density readings.

5. Determine and record the average of the five densities read for each step.
6. Select from the average values calculated from the 21 steps to determine the
film parameter values as follows:

4-2 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Quality Control Procedures

a. Determine which step has a density closest to 2.20. Then determine which
step has a density closest to but not less than 0.45. Designate the difference
between these densities as Density Difference (DD).
b. Determine which step has an average density closest to but not less than
1.20. Designate this step as Medium Density (MD).
c. Designate the average for Step 1 (or the clear area on the film) as Base Plus
Fog.
d. Record the numeric values of DD, MD and Base Plus Fog on the center lines
of the Laser imager QC Chart. (See Figure 4-2.) Record also the step
numbers involved.

Figure 4-1. QC Step Wedge

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 4-3


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Density
Difference

HD Step #___
–HD Step #___

Medium
Density

Step #___

Base
Plus Fog

Figure 4-2. Quality Control Chart

4-4 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Quality Control Procedures

Running a Daily QC Test


The MQSA requires that a sensitometric test be run daily and that clinical images be
made only when the control chart is within the control ranges. Kodak recommends
the following laser imager test. Perform this test daily before clinical mammograms
are run, to ensure quality output. Plot the values obtained from the test on the Laser
Imager QC Chart for comparison with the film parameter values established in the
baseline test.
1. Apply power to the 8610 and allow it to warm to READY, as indicated on the
local panel. (The 8610 will print a film calibration sheet, indicating that its
Automatic Image Quality Control system is functioning.)
2. Print a QC Step Wedge film per the procedure on page 5-15 of this User Guide.
3. Use a densitometer to read the designated steps on the test film. Read at the
center of each step. If a clear area on the film was used instead of step 1 in the
baseline tests (see page 4-2), use a clear area in this QC test.
4. Record the date on the control chart. Then plot the DD, MD, and Base Plus Fog
values in the appropriate column on the chart.
5. Determine if any of the values exceeds the control limits for the parameter.

Note
The numbers above and below the center lines on the chart indicate the
control limits. For example, for DD or MD, 0.10 above or below the center line is
approaching the limit, but is acceptable. However, 0.15 above or below the line
is not acceptable.

6. If the values did not exceed a control limit, examine the chart and see if there is
a trend which suggests possible future problems. (This could be, for example,
three or more data points for DD, MD or Base Plus Fog in succession moving
upward or downward.) If the data points have not exceeded the limits, clinical
mammograms can continue to be run.
7. If any value exceeds a control limit, DO NOT run clinical mammograms until the
problem is corrected. Proceed as follows:
a. Circle the out of control point(s) on the chart.
b. Correct the problem. (The fault could be in the film, imager or densitometer,
or in the performance of the QC procedure.)
c. Note the cause of the problem in the “Remarks” section of the control chart.
d. Repeat the step wedge test and graph the parameters on the control chart.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 4-5


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

BLANK PAGE

4-6 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Troubleshooting

Section 5 – Troubleshooting

Local Panel Message Types


The local panel displays two types of messages:
• Status Messages – Provide information and require no operator action.
• Error Messages – Indicate an error condition inside the Kodak DryView 8610
Laser Imager. Some messages tell you what action to take to fix the error, but in
some cases a service call is needed to deal with a problem. If the error message
does not clear after you perform the specified action, call for service.
Table 5-1 lists all messages that can appear on the two lines of the local panel
display. For error messages:
• The Information Line (line 1) of each display contains the error title and (in most
cases) a two-digit error code.
• The Action Line (line 2) contains additional information/procedures about the
error condition.

Local Panel Messages


If the Operator Action specified in Table 5-1 does not correct the machine problem,
call for service (see page 5-19).
Table 5-1. Operator Related Local Panel Messages
Message Operator Action
ASIC LINE BUFFER FAIL (48) Power the 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE reappears, call for service.
ASIC SELF TEST FAIL (60) Power the 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE reappears, call for service.
A TO D CONVERTER FAILURE (88) Power the 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds,
POWER 8610 OFF, THEN BACK ON then power back on. If message
reappears, call for service.
CALIBRATION FAILED (69) Press Enter. Then stand by while 8610
PRESS ENTER TO LOAD DEFAULT GAMMA automatically loads default tables. Make
TABLES sure to check image quality.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 5-1


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Message Operator Action


CALIBRATION FAIL: Dmin HI, Dmax XXX.X (70) Press Enter. Then stand by while 8610
PRESS ENTER TO BUILD GAMMA TABLES automatically builds gamma tables. If
image quality is unacceptable, use new
film.
DEVELOPER OVER TEMPERATURE (17) Unable to control temperature. Power
POWER 8610 OFF, THEN BACK ON 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
power back on. If message reappears,
call for service.
DEVELOPER UNDER TEMPERATURE (19) Unable to control temperature. Power
POWER 8610 OFF, THEN BACK ON 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds, then
power back on. If message reappears,
call for service.
DOUBLE FILM FEED – REMOVE MISFEED (24) Insert the film saver and remove the film
INSERT FILM SAVER TO REMOVE FILM TRAY tray. Discard any sheets of film that are
jammed in the machine. If problem
persists, call for service.
DYNAMIC RAM FAILURE (72) Power 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE then power back on. If message
reappears, call for service.
FILM TRAPPED INSIDE EXPOSURE AREA (23) Insert the film saver. Raise the cover
CALL SERVICE – 8610 IS INOPERABLE and remove the film from the exposure
area. Close the cover and remove the
film saver. Press Enter to continue. If
film can’t be removed, call for service.
FILM TRAY EMPTY – INSERT FILM (29) 8610 is out of film. Remove film tray and
load a new film package.
FILM TRAY UNLOCKED (11). Remove and reinsert film tray into 8610.
INSERT FILM TRAY FULLY TO CLEAR ERROR

FLASH EPROM FAILURE (75) Power 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE reappears, call for service.
GALVANOMETER FAILURE (45) Power 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE reappears, call for service.
IDLE The associated input is not being used.

5-2 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Troubleshooting

Message Operator Action


IMAGE MEMORY FOR INPUT A (B) IS FULL Press Enter to continue. As films are
(80) PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE printed, memory will become available.
8610 OFF-LINE Press Enter to place 8610 in service.
PRESS ENTER TO PLACE 8610 IN SERVICE

8610 OPEN (16) Be sure the top cover is closed and


CLOSE COVER latched.
INPUT A (B) ACQUISITION TIMEOUT (66) Retry image acquire. Check wire
connections from the modality to the
8610. If problem persists, call for
service.
INPUT A (B) DMA FAILURE (74) Power 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE reappears, call for service.
INPUT A (B) FIFO NOT EMPTY FAILURE (67) Reacquire the image to be printed.
INPUT A (B) HEADER FAILURE (64) Try acquiring an image again. If problem
persists, call for service.
INPUT A (B) IDENTIFY ERROR (63) Power 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE reappears, call for service.
INPUT A (B) IMAGE SIZES NOT IDENTICAL Verify the image is the same size as the
(35) PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE previously captured image.
INPUT A (B) IMAGE TOO LARGE TO PRINT Maximum image size is 6.1 megabytes.
(37) Retry with a smaller image.
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

INPUT A (B) OVERFLOW FAILURE (65) Try acquiring an image again. If problem
persists, call for service.
INPUT A (B) PROGRAM MEMORY FULL Press Enter to continue.
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

INPUT A (B) SYNC FAILURE (39) Power 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds,
then power back on. If message
reappears, call for service.
INPUT A (B) UNDERFLOW FAILURE (62) Try acquiring an image again. If problem
persists, call for service.
INSERT FILM TRAY (12) Insert the film tray.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 5-3


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Message Operator Action


INSUFFICIENT MEMORY FOR IMAGE FILE A Press Enter to continue. As films are
(B) (81) PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE printed, memory will become available.
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY FOR PRINTSET A (B) Press Enter to continue. As films are
(82) PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE printed, memory will become available.
INVALID DATA RECEIVED FROM INPUT A (B) Call for service.
(53) - PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE
LAMP FAILED TO REACH TEMPERATURE (71) Call for service.
PRESS ENTER TO LOAD DEFAULT GAMMA
TABLES

LASER BOARD FAILURE (46) Power 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE reappears, call for service.
LOADING DEFAULT GAMMA TABLES Automatic operation. Verify image
quality.
LOCAL PANEL BUFFER OVERFLOW (85) Power 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE reappears, call for service.
LOCAL PANEL RAM FAILURE (73) Power 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE. reappears, call for service.
MAXIMUM DENSITY LESS THAN 3.5 No action required.
NO IMAGE ACQUIRED ON INPUT A (B) (68) Reacquire an image.
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE

NON-VOLATILE CLOCK RAM FAILURE (96) Power 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE reappears, call for service.
NON-VOLATILE RAM FAILURE (97) Power 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds,
CALL SERVICE – PRESS ENTER TO then power back on. If message
CONTINUE reappears, call for service.
NO RESPONSE FROM KEYPAD A (B) (78) Power 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds,
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE then power back on. If message
reappears, call for service.

5-4 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Troubleshooting

Message Operator Action


NO RESPONSE FROM INPUT A (B) Power 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds,
then power back on. If message
reappears, call for service.
PERFORMING CALIBRATION None.
PERFORMING SELF-TEST None.
POWER DISTRIBUTION FAILURE (49) Power 8610 off, wait 10-20 seconds,
TURN OFF 8610 – CALL SERVICE then power back on. If message
reappears, call for service.
PRINT JOB LIST FULL (86) Wait until some films have printed
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE before sending more images to print.
REGULATING TEMPERATURE 8610 adjusting temperature. If not
completed in 45 minutes, call service.
REMOVE FILM FROM EXIT AREA (28) Insert the film saver. Raise the cover
INSERT FILM SAVER TO REMOVE FILM TRAY and remove film from the exit area.
Close cover and remove the film saver.
Press Enter to continue.
REMOVE FILM SAVER (31) Remove the film saver from the tray.
REMOVE FILM TRAY (40) Insert film saver and remove film tray.
REMOVE, LOAD, AND INSERT FILM TRAY (12) Remove the film tray, load film, and
re-install the film tray.
REMOVE, LOAD, AND INSERT FILM TRAY (30) Press Enter. Remove the film tray, load
PRESS ENTER WHEN READY TO REMOVE film, and re-install the tray.
TRAY

REMOVE MISFEED FROM DEVELOPER AREA Film stopped in the developer area.
(27) Check for blockage of film path from
INSERT FILM SAVER TO REMOVE FILM TRAY developer. Insert film saver. Raise cover
and open the developer cover. Remove
the film sheet and close the developer
cover. Close the cover and remove the
film saver. Press Enter to continue.
REMOVE MISFEED FROM EXPOSURE AREA Insert film saver. Raise cover and
(22) INSERT FILM SAVER TO REMOVE FILM remove film from exposure area. Close
TRAY cover and remove film saver. Press
Enter to continue.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 5-5


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Message Operator Action


REMOVE MISFEED FROM FILM TRAY (20) Insert film saver. Remove film tray.
INSERT FILM SAVER TO REMOVE FILM TRAY Remove misfed film sheet.
REPEATED ERROR DURING EXPOSURE (50) Press Enter to print all queued images.
PRESS ENTER TO PRINT ALL QUEUED Call for service if error persists.
IMAGES

SCHEDULE PM Call service and request to have the


8610 cleaned.
SUPPLY= XX Indicates the number of sheets of film
left in the film tray.
SUPPLY=? XX Indicates the number of sheets of film
that should be left in the film tray. The ?
indicates that the film count has been
interrupted by a film jam that required
use of the film saver, or that power to
the 8610 has been interrupted.
TIMEOUT WAITING FOR FILM TRAY REMOVAL Press Enter. Then remove the film tray
– PRESS ENTER WHEN READY TO REMOVE when the release latch is activated.
TRAY

UNABLE TO FEED FILM (33) Message is displayed after third attempt


PRESS ENTER TO TRY AGAIN to feed film. Insert the film saver and
remove the film carrier from the 8610.
Gently shake the film carrier. Remove
any film stuck in film tray cavity of 8610
and reinsert tray. Press Enter to try
again.
UNABLE TO UNLOCK FILM TRAY (34) Manually depress the film carrier
REMOVE FILM TRAY MANUALLY TO release button on the 8610 and remove
CONTINUE film tray manually.
UNASSIGNED ERROR CONDITION Call for service.
VERY FEW STEPS IN TOE OF DLOG E CURVE Examine the quality of the calibration
VERIFY IMAGE QUALITY print. You may have to try new film.
WAIT FOR SHEET TO EXIT BEFORE Wait for sheet to exit before removing
REMOVING TRAY FROM 8610 tray from 8610.
WARMING UP None.

5-6 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Troubleshooting

Clearing Film Jams – General


The film jam areas referred to in local display error messages are shown in
Figure 5-1.
• A is the film tray area, where film misfeeds can possibly occur.
• B and C identify the rollers on either side of the exposure area.
• D and E identify the developer and film exit areas.

C
D Film Tray

B A

Figure 5-1. Possible Film Jam Locations

The following pages provide procedures for clearing film jams from all the areas
identified above. Before performing any of the procedures you must install the film
saver on the film tray, and remove the film tray from the machine.

Note
Shutting off power to clear a film jam is not required. Shutting off the power
deletes all currently acquired (but unprinted) images and may clear some
error messages. If you do this, you will have to resend the unprinted images to
the 8610.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 5-7


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Inserting the Film Saver and Removing the Film Tray


1. Insert the film saver and remove the film tray as shown in Figure 5-2.
2. If the film tray does not pull out, use a pen or pencil to push the tray release
button located on the left side of the film tray. See Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-2. Inserting the Film Saver and Removing the Film Tray

Film Tray
Release Button 8300-135A

Figure 5-3. Releasing the Film Tray

5-8 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Troubleshooting

Clearing Jams from the Film Tray Area


1. Check to see if a jam has occurred in the film tray, or film is partially protruding
from the tray.
2. Check inside the tray opening of the machine for jammed film.
3. If you cannot locate the jam, raise the top cover after pushing in the button on
the right side of the machine (see Figure 5-4). Then proceed to the next
paragraph.

Figure 5-4. Raising the Top Cover

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 5-9


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Clearing Jams from the Exposure Area


With the top cover open, allow time for the developer to cool. Visually check for a
film jam in the interior of the machine.
1. Lift the wire guide for access to film in the bottom of the machine.
See Figure 5-5.
2. Place the wire guide in the upward position as shown in Figure 5-5.
3. Remove any film jams.
4. Return the wire guide to its original position. Make sure it snaps into place.
5. Close the top cover carefully until it latches.

1 2

3 4

Figure 5-5. Clearing Film Jams in the Exposure Area

5-10 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Troubleshooting

Clearing Jams from the Developer and Exit Areas

Safety Precautions
Take care working around the developer area. The developer drum is hot during
normal system operation. When the machine top cover is raised, power is
disconnected from the drum and it begins to cool down. However, up to an hour may
elapse before the drum is cool.

!
Caution
Do not touch the developer drum.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 5-11


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Clearing the Developer or Exit Jam


1. Open the top cover and unlatch the developer assembly cover (see Figure 5-6).
2. Open the developer assembly cover and allow time for the developer to cool.
3. Pull to remove any jammed film. (Caution: The film may still be hot.) To aid in
removing the film, you may rotate the drum by turning the gear on the left side of
the drum.
4. Close and latch the cover.

1 2

3 4

8300-34A
8300-35A

Figure 5-6. Clearing Film Jams from the Developer and Exit Areas

Note
Check to see that all jams reported by error messages have been corrected. If
additional error messages have occurred, they may recur after the power-up
self test. If they do, refer to Table 5-1 for instructions.

5-12 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Troubleshooting

System Tests
Use the test menus to test 8610 Laser Imager operation.

Note
While running system tests, you cannot acquire and print images.
You can run the following tests on the 8610:
1. QC Step Wedge – Prints a QC step wedge for use in the daily quality control
process (see Section 4).
2. Print SMPTE Pattern – Prints four stored test pattern images on one film.
3. Keypad Test – This function is not used with the 8610. (It applies only to
imagers with a keypad.)
4. Display Software Versions – Displays versions for software programs that run
the 8610.
5. Display System Configuration – Displays current system configuration values
such as image memory, contrast and density parameters for each input (user).

Test Menus

QC Step Wedge
See page 5-15

Print SMPTE
Pattern 4:1
See page 5-15

Keypad Test

Display Software
Versions
See page 5-16

Display System
Configuration
See page 5-17

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 5-13


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Menu Buttons
Use the following buttons to access, start, and exit test menus:
1. Test Button – Accesses test menus.
2. Down Arrow Button – Scrolls to the next test. From the last test, scrolls to the
first test.
3. Up Arrow Button – Scrolls to the previous test. From the first test, scrolls to the
last test.
4. Enter Button – After you access a test menu, allows required conditions to be
set or starts a test.
5. Exit Button – Cancels a test or a parameter change.

A: DIGITAL READY SYSTEM READY


B: NONE IDLE SCHEDULE PM SUPPLY= xx

Figure 5-7. Menu Buttons

5-14 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Troubleshooting

Print QC Step Wedge


To print a QC step wedge:

1. Access the QC Step Wedge menu by pressing Test


.

2. Initiate the test print by pressing Enter .

• If the step wedge prints successfully, the Print QC Step Wedge menu is
again displayed.
• If a fault occurs, an error message is displayed.

3. To cancel the test, press Exit


. The system displays a “PRINT CANCELLED BY
OPERATOR” message.

4. To return to “System Ready,” press Exit


.

Print SMPTE Pattern


To run a Print SMPTE Pattern test:

1. From the QC Step Wedge menu, press to access the Print SMPTE Pattern
display.

2. To print the SMPTE pattern, press Enter .

• Follow instructions on the local panel to set up conditions for the test.
• If the print completes successfully, the Print SMPTE Pattern menu is
displayed.
• If a fault occurs, an error message is displayed.

3. To cancel the print, press Exit


. The system displays a TEST CANCELLED BY
OPERATOR message.

4. To return to the first Print SMPTE Pattern menu, press Exit


.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 5-15


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Display Software Versions


The 8610 contains the following types of software.
• Imager Firmware
• VRTX32
• Contrast Tables
• Convolution Kernel
If you need to check the version of one of these software programs, access the
software versions as follows:

1. From the Keypad Test display, press to access the Display Software
Versions menu. Use this menu to access the software versions.

2. To see the current Imager Firmware version, press Enter :

IMAGER FIRMWARE 2.0

3. To access the VRTX32 version, press :

VRTX32 1.0.8

4. To access the Contrast Tables version, press :

CONTRAST TABLES 6.P.1

5. To access the Convolution Kernel version, press :

CONVOLUTION KERNEL M.1.0

6. To return to the Display Software Versions menu, press Exit


.

5-16 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Troubleshooting

Display System Configuration


This parameter allows the system configuration values to be displayed. The
configuration values appear in the order listed below:

1. DRAM
See page 5-18

2. Contrast Tables
See page 5-18

3. Density
See page 5-18

4. Convolution
See page 5-18

5. Copies
See page 5-18

6. User’s ID
See page 5-18

7. Protocol
See page 5-18

8. Modality
See page 5-18

To display system configuration values:


1. To access the Display System Configuration menu, from the Display Software
Versions menu, press .

2. Press Enter to access each of the menus listed in Table 5-2.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 5-17


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Configuration Menu Table


Table 5-2. Configuration Menus

Configuration Menu Description


DRAM (Memory) Displays current DRAM configuration. The DRAM
display shows how the image memory is configured
between the two input modules.
Example:
A: 127.75 B: 0
CONTRAST TABLES Shows the contrast table selected for each input.
Example:
A: 6 B: 7
DENSITY Shows the density setting selected for each input.
Example:
A: 16 B: 9
CONVOLUTION Shows the convolution setting for each input.
(Sharp/Smooth) Example:
A: 1 B: 4
COPIES Shows the copies to print setting for each input.
Example:
A: 1 B: 1
USER’S ID Shows the user’s ID setting for each input.
Example:
A: DIGITAL B: NONE
PROTOCOL Shows the control protocol setting for each input.
Example:
A: 3M B: 3M
MODALITY Shows the input module installed for each input.
Example:
A: 3MDIG B: DIGITAL

5-18 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Troubleshooting

Calling for Support


Once you have tried the recommended troubleshooting procedures on the preceding
pages, but are unable to repair the machine, it is time to call for help.
Before you call for Service, have the following information ready:
Model Number: 8610
Serial Number: (For serial number location, see page iv.)
Phone for Service (U.S.): 1-800-328-2910, Option 2

Note
For general information about Kodak Health Imaging Products, call
1-800-328-2910, Option 3.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 5-19


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

BLANK PAGE

5-20 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Specifications

Section 6 – Specifications

Dimensions
Height: 46 cm (18 in.)
Width: 46 cm (18 in.)
Depth: 66 cm (26 in.)
Weight: 56 Kg (124 lb)

Electrical
Phase: Single
Voltage: U.S.: 100 to 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Outside U.S.: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power: 800 Watts maximum

Operating Environment
Temperature: 15° to 32° C (59° to 90° F)
Relative Humidity: 15% to 75% RH, Non-condensing
Magnetic Field: 100 Gauss (Max)
Barometric Pressure: 20.76 in. Hg to 31.3 in. Hg
700 hPa to 1060 hPa

Non-Operating Environment: Shipping and Storage


Temperature: 30° to 60° C (–22° to 140° F)
Relative Humidity: 15% RH for 96 hr. to 85% RH, Non-condensing for 24 hr.
Barometric Pressure: 14.76 in. Hg to 31.3 in. Hg
500 hPa to 1060 hPa

Interface Modules
DICOM via Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System,
Kodak PACS Link 25 Print Server, or
Kodak PACS Link Medical Image Manager 200

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 6-1


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Control Interfaces
Control Panel
Host

Output
First Print (after Ready indicator lights): Approximately 185 Seconds
Subsequent Prints: Approximately 40 Prints/Hr

Film Characteristics
Size: 8-inch by 10-inch
Cartridge Capacity: 101 Sheets (only 100 sheets are imaged)

Options
Second Input Module

Agency Compliance
See “Agency Approvals” in the Safety, EMC, and CE Marking paragraph at the
beginning of this manual.

Restrictions
The Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager / for Mammography cannot be used in
the presence of flammable anesthetic gas mixtures.
Only factory trained personnel are authorized to install and service the 8610.
Circuit drawings are made available to the service technician.

6-2 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Technical Information

Section 7 – Technical Information


Kodak DryView Mammography Laser Imaging Film is a high-resolution,
infrared-sensitive, photothermographic film designed specifically for the Kodak
DryView 8610 Laser Imaging System.
This new film delivers the same diagnostic image quality you get with your current
silver halide laser films – but it requires no “wet” chemistry, no “wet” film processors,
and no darkroom procedures, which means there is no need for special plumbing,
wet chemistry disposal procedures, or modifications to your facility. This new film is
packaged in daylight load packages and is available in 8 inch by 10 inch size. It is
available in blue 7 mil polyester base.

Spectral Sensitivity
Mammography Laser Imaging Film is infrared sensitive and has been sensitized to
the infrared laser diode of Laser Imaging Systems. When the film is handled
according to instructions on the film package, safelights are not needed. If you wish
to remove undeveloped film from the daylight load package, you will need a
darkroom setting and a green safelight.

Image Quality
Mammography Laser Imaging Film delivers diagnostic-quality, continuous-tone
images along with sharp alphanumerics and optimum contrast. This high-quality
silver-based film provides radiologists with diagnostic information similar to what they
are accustomed to viewing – including the spatial resolution, contrast, and gray
levels. Plus, because it is a totally dry imaging process, there is no image quality
variability due to “wet” chemistry.

Image Sharpness
Image sharpness is an important parameter for understanding image quality in
mammography. Image sharpness is determined by measuring the Contrast Transfer
Function (CTF) of square wave modulated bar patterns (on-off-on, etc.) of various
spatial frequencies.

The CTF vs. spatial frequency was calculated for the 8610 Laser Imaging System using
the following expression

CTF = (Dmax – Dmin)/(DMAX – DMIN)

where Dmax is the maximum density of the bars and Dmin is the minimum density

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 7-1


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

between the bars. DMAX and DMIN correspond to broad area maximum and minimum
density values. Average CTF values were calculated by averaging the horizontal and
vertical CTF data. In order to determine CTF, the 8610 Laser Imager printed on-off-on
bar patterns on DVM media with various spatial frequencies at a maximum density of
3.0. The spatial density variations of the bar patterns were measured by a
microdensitometer and the CTF was determined based on the expression given above.
A plot of the average CTF vs. spatial frequency is shown below.

Automatic Image Quality Control


Mammography Laser Imaging Film is system-matched for use with Kodak’s unique
Automatic Image Quality Control technology. This technology, which is a standard
feature of Laser Imaging Systems, is designed to ensure that contrast, density, and
other image quality parameters meet preset user preferences, package-to-package,
lot-to-lot.

7-2 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Technical Information

Less Impact on the Environment


Disposal regulations and procedures for “wet” processing chemistry are
time-consuming and expensive, and even with the most exacting procedures, the
potential to discharge hazardous materials into the environment exists.
Tests show that Mammography Laser Imaging Film is not considered hazardous to
the environment. As a result, you can develop, recycle, and dispose of films with
less impact on the environment than if you were using wet developed silver halide
films.

Mammography Laser Imaging Film


Environmental Regulations Comparison
Wet Silver Halide Kodak
DryView

Developer Fixer Wash Film Film


Product
Regulation
OSHA MSDS Yes Yes No No No
DOT Hazard Yes Yes No No No
Use Permits Local* Local* Local* No No
Disposal
Regulation**
EPA Hazard Yes Yes Yes No No
DOT Hazard Yes Yes No No No
Local Sewer Yes Yes Yes NA NA
Authority

Note: There is no SUPERFUND liability with Mammography Laser Imaging Film.

* “Local” = Regulated in many/most localities.


** State and local laws vary. Consult appropriate regulations or authorities prior to disposal.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 7-3


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Storage and Handling of Undeveloped Film


As with other laser imaging films, to achieve consistent results 77°F 25°C
up to the expiration date indicated on the film package, 41°F 5°C
Mammography Laser Imaging Film must be stored in a cool,
dry place (41°F/5°C to 77°F/25°C) and protected from
radiation and chemistry fumes. TEMP

The film can withstand short-term temperature spikes (up to 95°F/35°C for several
hours) during transit without any significant effect on film quality or performance.
Transit temperatures above 95°F/35°C will gradually diminish shelf life. If the
Automatic Image Quality Control (AIQC) system encounters film that has been
damaged by improper handling, it will automatically alert system operators before
the film is developed.

Handling of Developed Film


Like other photographic films or data storage materials, the handling of
Mammography Laser Imaging Film requires reasonable care. Spills, humidity, and
other moisture typically have no significant effect on developed films. Prolonged
exposure to intense light or excessive heat (130°F/54.4°C for more than three hours)
may cause some gradual darkening of images. Leaving films in vehicles in hot
climates for extended periods of time is not recommended.
Under typical working conditions, Mammography Laser Imaging Film will maintain
diagnostic quality for over 100 years. For best results, store film in sleeves when not
being reviewed. Mammography Laser Imaging Film can be left on a light box for
more than 24 hours; in extreme cases in which light boxes are exceptionally hot
(120°F/49°C), we recommend removing them prior to eight hours of continuous
exposure.
Care should be taken when using spotlight viewing for more than 30 seconds,
because temperatures near the light source may exceed 180°F/82.2°C. “Cool” hot
lights should be used. Use in slide projectors is not recommended due to the high
temperatures generally found in these devices.
With the new Kodak DryView technology, a small amount of final development
occurs when the film exits the 8610 Laser Imager and is initially exposed to ambient
or view box lighting. This is virtually undetectable and has no effect on image quality
(i.e., less than 0.02 change in density). This small density increase is uniform and
permanent upon full exposure of the film under normal handling conditions (i.e.,
room light or view box).

7-4 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Technical Information

Archivability of Developed Film


Mammography Laser Imaging Film is fully archivable for more than 100 years when
stored at American National Standards Institute (ANSI) recommended storage
conditions (77°F/25°C). Developed films may be stored at higher temperatures, but
that may affect archivability. For example, storing films at a constant elevated
temperature of 90°F/32.2°C may reduce archivability to 15 years.

Exposure to Moisture
While moisture can damage traditional wet processed silver halide films,
Mammography Laser Imaging Films typically withstand humidity, spills, and other
forms of water without any significant effect on image quality or film integrity. If
needed, films can be cleaned with a clean, damp cloth.

Odor Dissipation
The “wet” chemistry associated with the development of silver halide film creates
strong, unpleasant odors. By eliminating “wet” chemistry, Kodak DryView technology
eliminates virtually all of these processing odors. While some low-level odors are
produced during the development process, they pose no known adverse health
risks. Processing odor levels are further reduced by a non-hazardous filter in Laser
Imaging Systems. This filter traps most low-level odors and prevents them from
dissipating into the work environment. To help maintain optimum performance, the
filter requires periodic replacement. Unlike silver halide systems, Laser Imagers
require no special venting.

Heat Dissipation
Laser Imaging Systems use controlled heat to develop Laser Imaging Films. The
heat has virtually no effect on the air temperature of the work area. The amount of
heat dissipated into an area during a day is typically less than the heat generated by
four 100-watt light bulbs.

2002 September Rev. C 8229338 7-5


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imager User Guide

Film Recycling
According to U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) standards,
Mammography Laser Imaging Film is not considered hazardous – it requires no
special disposal procedures. But it does contain silver and polyester that may be
recovered by using one of several recycling processes.
If you are interested in recycling and silver recovery, Kodak can provide your local
recyclers with the information they need to get started. In some countries, Kodak has
established national contracts with recycling firms. Call your local sales
representative for more information about these contracts.

Kodak and DryView are trademarks of Eastman Kodak Company.

7-6 8229338 2002 September Rev. C


Kodak DryView 8610 Laser Imaging System / for Mammography
– Operator Training Guidelines
The field engineer will cover the following information with the operator upon completion of the
hardware installation: (All references are to the User Guide.)
Product Overview (Section 1)
Identify system capabilities and special features:
 A. Time for first print and subsequent prints (1-1)
 B. Acquisition from a host modality (via a network) (1-1)
 C. Describe the simple film path. (1-2)
 D. Automatic Image Quality Control (1-3)
Controls and Indicators (Section 2)
 Demonstrate how to power on the unit. (2-1)
Local Panel:
 A. Identify the controls. (2-2)
 B. Explain that B Setup is not currently used.
A Setup:
 A. Demonstrate that as menus are displayed, the top line states the condition, and the
second line states the action for change.
 B. Advise that changes to the Density, Contrast, and Sharp/Smooth parameters under A
Setup will have no effect on the printed images. (These three parameters are set by
the modality or at the Kodak PACS Link 9410 Acquisition System.)
 C. Advise that the menus for Number of Copies, Autoprint, Film Layout, Keypad Format
and Audible Alerts do not apply to the 8610 Laser Imager (They apply only to imagers
with a keypad. Also, Exposure Index is for future use.)
 D. Demonstrate that a film calibration can be performed from A Setup.
Operation (Section 3)
 A. Explain what happens during the power on sequence. (3-1)
 B. Demonstrate loading the film tray, and have an operator perform the procedure. Make
sure the operator is aware that the film saver is not used when loading new film. (3-8)
Advise the operator that film is packed with 101 sheets, and the last sheet is used as
a barrier sheet and is not fed.
 C. Demonstrate how to clean the film tray with an alcohol soaked pad such as TexPad
TX801. (3-8) Leave a few of the pads with the customer and advise that TexPads or a
similar type of cleaning pad should be ordered.
Quality Control Procedures (Section 4)
 A. Demonstrate how to run a QC Baseline Test. (4-1)
 B. Show the operator how to run a Daily QC Test. (4-5)

1
Troubleshooting (Section 5)
Demonstrate how to:
 A. Interpret status and error (display) codes. (5-1)
 B. Open laser to clear jams, using film saver to remove film tray part way in order to
open top cover. (5-8)
 C. Look for possible jammed film in film tray, exposure, developer and exit areas. (5-9)
 D. Perform System Tests using the Test button and arrowing down past the QC Step
Wedge Menu. (5-13)
Placing a service call: (5-20)
 A. Model and serial number identification.
 B. Working with the Customer Care Center. (They will try to assist user over the phone.)
Technical Information (Section 7)
 No chemicals and no special venting required. (7-1)
 A. Describe storage of undeveloped film: (7-4)
1. 41°F/5°C to 77°F/25°C
2. Protected from radiation and chemistry fumes (wet processor)
 B. Describe handling of developed film : (7-4)
1. Spills, humidity, and moisture have no significant effect.
2. Leaving films in vehicles in hot climates for extended periods is not
recommended.
3. Store film in sleeves when not being reviewed.
4. Light box viewing:
a. If light box is exceptionally hot, remove film prior to 8 hours.
b. Hot light viewing should be performed with a “cool” hot light and viewing time
should be minimal.
5. Small density increase:
a. Uniform across film
b. Permanent upon full exposure of the film under normal handling conditions
 Describe archivability of developed film. (7-5) – 100 years when stored at recommended
storage conditions.
Film Recycling: (7-6)
 A. Not hazardous according to EPA standards
 B. No special disposal procedures
 C. Silver and polyester may be recovered
I feel that the field engineer has covered all relevant information relating to the 8610 Laser
Imager.
DATE
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
FIELD ENGINEER SIGNATURE

You might also like